MWGAMING domain login,Dream catcher spiritual meaning.REGISTER NOW GET FREE 888 PESOS REWARDS! https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/guides/strategy/ Casino.org Online Casino Blog covers the latest news, tips, strategies and in-depth articles about the online casino industry and gambling in general. Fri, 13 Sep 2024 15:17:40 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.5 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/cropped-corg-favicon-512-32x32.png Simple Gambling Strategy Guides - Casino.org Blog https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/guides/strategy/ 32 32 Mastering PFR Poker: Advanced Strategies & Statistical Insights https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/pfr-poker/ Wed, 11 Sep 2024 10:35:23 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41924 PFR Poker: What You Need to Know
  • Dive into advanced Pre-Flop Raise (PFR) strategies to elevate your poker game and gain a competitive edge at the casino table.
  • Explore insights from poker statistics and analysis to understand the impact of PFR poker on hand ranges, aggression levels, and overall gameplay dynamics.
  • Learn how to adjust your PFR poker range based on position, stack sizes, opponent tendencies, and table dynamics for strategic advantage.
  • Implement sophisticated PFR tactics, such as 3-betting and balancing ranges, to exploit opponents and maximize profitability.
  • Master the art of PFR poker by combining technical expertise with psychological insights to outplay opponents and achieve consistent success in your games.

Every possible edge in Texas Hold ‘Em can lead to better outcomes and, let’s face it, the fewer opponents you have the better odds you have of winning. One of the advanced strategies in Texas Hold ‘Em is known as the Pre-Flop Raise (PFR).

What is PFR in poker? A PFR Poker strategy is raising the bet before any community cards are revealed (pre-flop). At the beginning, the only money in the pot is from the big blind and small blind. After the hold cards are dealt, the first round of betting begins when players can bet, check, call or raise.

If you’re learning how to play poker and want to consider PFR, this article should prove the basic details to get you started and what to look out for.

Pre-Flop Raise as a Strategy

There are many reasons why PFR can be an important strategy and impacts gameplay in a variety of ways:

  • Strong Hole Cards: The community cards can go any number of ways but if you’re holding two strong cards, you can raise before the flop to indicate and scare away potential opponents and/or build the pot.
  • Minimize competition: If another player folds, that’s one less person who could potentially find favorable cards in the flop, turn or river. We’ve all been in the position where we fold bad cards only to discover they could have turned into a winning hand.
  • Make Them Pay for the Flop: If you have a good hand, don’t let the others see the flop for cheap. Your Pre-Flop Raise indicates your hand is strong and you deserve to play into the next round.
  • Collecting Intelligence: If a player folds, they thought their hand was weak. However, if they call or raise, you now have information that they could be holding a strong hand as well.
  • Psychological Warfare: If you PFR aggressively, you’re signaling to the others players that you’re not afraid to play and apply some pressure.

What Does the Pre-Flop Raise Percentage Mean?

To determine the PFR percentage, take the number of hands in which a player raises pre-flop versus the number of hands played. If a player raises 15 times out of 100 hands played, the percentage is 15%.

This is used to assess a player’s style and how aggressive or conservative they are and what strategy you can use against it.

Generally, a PFR percentage above 15% indicates they are more aggressive.

image for PFR poker

Image credit: RomanR/Shutterstock

What is VPIP?

Voluntary Put money In Pot, or VPIP, is a percentage of how often a player bets, calls or raises. This doesn’t include blinds because those bets aren’t voluntary. An example would be if out of 100 hands played, if you voluntarily put money in 50 times, the VPIP would be 50%.

The Relationship Between VPIP and PFR

The way in which VPIP and PFR are related is in regards to poker strategy and how players bet at the beginning of a hand. While VPIP can happen at any time, PFR obviously can only occur before the flop. However, whether you’re the player raising pre-flop or it’s someone else, it is a key indicator on someone’s betting style.

A player willing to raise pre-flop or has a high Volunteer Put money in Pot percentage plays more aggressively. They are willing to gamble more often, re-raise when prompted and pressure their opponents into calling.

On the opposite side of the spectrum is the player with a lower VPIP and someone more likely to call rather than bet. They tend to play hands more conservatively, which means they’ll play when they have a higher likelihood of winning and less likely to bluff.

Raising pre-flop and monitoring the VPIP of other players can provide you with information about opponents’ hands and force them to call, raise or fold in times they would otherwise make a different decision.

Is PFR higher than VPIP? Generally, no. Players are more likely to put money in voluntarily as the game progresses rather than pre-flop.

PFR Values in Different Poker Formats

Depending on the poker format, there are different values that PFR may have.

  • PFR in Six-Max Games are tight-knit with only six players vying for the pot (as opposed to a 9-10 player format). Because this is a smaller game, the players tend to be aggressive. There is a tendency for more action and the game moves quicker. Players have a PFR percentage closer to 20-30% with the more conservative players still raising pre-flop around 15% of the time.

  • PFR in Full Ring Games are played with more traditional PFR percentages because there are 9-10 players. Unlike in the six-man games, the aggressive players in full ring games have a PFR percentage closer to 15%. The more conservative players will raise pre-flop only about 5-8% of the time.

  • PFR in Zoom Poker Games is fast-moving, as the name suggests, which means players who want to stay in will PFR aggressively. In a game in which if you fold, you get moved to a new table, there is a greater incentive to stick around and learn your opponents’ strategies. The most aggressive players can have a PFR percentage close to 30%. The likelihood of moving frequently means you have to change your strategy all the time.
image for PFR poker

Image credit: RomanR/Shutterstock

Exploiting Opponents Using PFR

If you can identify different player types with PFR while playing Texas Hold ‘Em, you’ll be better prepared to challenge your opponents and have an edge with your hand.

4 Types of PFR Players

Although these percentages will vary depending on whether you’re playing a Six-Man Game, Full-Ring Game or Zoom Game, the types of PFR player remains the same. For context, the below percentages are based on a Full-Ring Game.

  1. Aggressive Players play just like that: aggressively. They will have a PFR range between 12-20%, so it’s likely they will raise pre-flop in 1 out of 5 games. An aggressive players’ strategy puts pressure on the others and often forces them to either fold (reducing the number of opponents) or call (which raises the poker equity). Aggressive players tend to play when they have a perceived strong hand.

  1. Tight-Aggressive Players tend to PFR selectively. Most of the time they’ll do it because they have a strong hand. They’ll occasionally bluff and hope to make a hand in the community cards, or force the others to fold. ?Tight-aggressive players have a PFR between 8-12%.

  1. Tight-Passive Players will typically raise pre-flop if they have a good hand so they have a lower PFR percentage at around 5-8%.

  1. Loose Players are similar to aggressive players in that they have a high PFR percentage. The difference is that a loose player’s strategy is about playing more hands and being somewhat unpredictable. Loose players will PFR even if they don’t have a great hand and have a high PFR percentage range of 15-20%, sometimes more.

So, how do you combat these varying PFR players? You can adjust the way you play by reading other players at the table to throw them off-balance. If a player is aggressive and calling or raising, get more selective in when you call or raise and ignore the pressure to raise or call.

If the players are more passive, consider raising with more frequency. This applies pressure on your opponents to call or raise, which increases the pot size, or will make them fold so you can take more blinds.

What is a good VPIP and PFR?

A good VPIP and PFR can be dependent on how a player chooses to play poker.

  • High VPIP and Low PFR: This type of player tends to call rather than raise unless they have a big hand. They likely won’t bluff and will play the cards, not their opponent.
  • Low VPIP and Low PFR: This type of player only plays big if they have a big hand. They don’t mind folding and rarely play big.
  • Medium VPIP and Low PFR: A medium VPIP means putting money in about a quarter of the time. They’re more likely a casual player who calls a lot of raises and won’t bet big unless they have a good hand. When they bet, assume they have a decent hand.
  • Medium VPIP and Medium PFR: This is the ideal strategy. If you’re not used to playing this way, ease yourself into it. It’s not easy playing a possible junk hand to outwit your opponents.

Common Mistakes to Avoid

  • Over-raising. With a high PFR percentage, you’re opening yourself to other aggressive players who might have better hands once the community cards are dealt. It’s okay to be aggressive, but consider your PFR percentage.
  • Raising to see the cards. If you Pre-Flop Raise or call to see the flop cards, you might be delaying the inevitable. There’s no point in losing chips just to see how things play out in the flop.
  • Failure to adjust. Poker is all about reading the other players. If you notice you’re at a table with aggressive players, failing to adjust is setting yourself up to make mistakes.
  • Playing based on potential. If you overvalue your hand and PFR on the possibilities, you’re playing with hope and not strategy. Learning the difference between exploitative play and GTO play is important in maintaining balance in your game.
image for PFR poker

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

PFR Poker Strategy

  • There are many reasons why PFR can be an important strategy and impacts gameplay in a variety of ways. It can help increase the pot, make others fold or be an aggressive move with strong hold cards, to name a few.
  • Consider both PFR and VPIP, which is the percentage a player voluntarily puts money in the pot. Both provide insight into a player’s strategy.
  • Depending on the poker format, a player may change their strategy.
  • There are generally four types of PFR players: Aggressive, Tight Aggressive, Tight Passive and Loose players.

There are many guides that can help players continue their poker education and no shortage of articles like this one that provide insights into overlooked strategies and information to take to the poker table.

One of the best ways to learn is to jump into it. If you’re a regular at a casino, live dealer poker or online poker game, start paying more attention to PFR and VPIP and consider how to take advantage of the players and their preferred methods of play.

]]>
Improve Your Blackjack Strategy: How to Count Cards Effectively https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/blackjack-card-counting/ Tue, 10 Sep 2024 09:07:25 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41913 Counting Cards: What You Need to Know
  • Develop a solid foundation in casino card counting to enhance your blackjack strategy by learning how to mentally track the ratio of high and low cards remaining in the deck.
  • Explore various card counting systems, such as the popular Hi-Lo or the MIT methods, to determine which approach aligns best with your skill level and playing preferences.
  • Hone your card counting proficiency through dedicated practice sessions that include drills and simulations using free online blackjack designed to simulate real blackjack scenarios.
  • Implement effective card counting strategies during gameplay by maintaining focus, staying attentive to the cards being dealt, and making calculated decisions based on your counting system’s signals.
  • Enhance your overall blackjack strategy by combining card counting with fundamental playing strategies, such as basic strategy charts.

A key to unlocking constant blackjack wins, a hockey system not worth trying, or just plain cheating? There is no doubt that card counting divides opinion, and there are a lot of myths around this technique. But exactly how do you count cards in blackjack?

On this page, we will break down those myths to bring you the truth about counting cards. Learn how to count cards and understand how this strategy can boost your blackjack gameplay.

How to Count Cards in Blackjack

Card counting in blackjack is a technique that can give the player an advantage by tracking high and low-value cards during a game. When you know how to count cards in blackjack, you essentially have a mental map of which cards have already been used and which remain. At its core, blackjack card counting gives players an extra advantage against the casino’s house edge.

Why Learn Card Counting?

Blackjack is a game of luck, even if it does have elements of skill. However, if you become good enough at counting cards, the game becomes beatable. Sounds great, but what’s the catch? Well, blackjack card counting is incredibly difficult and requires a lot of training and skill, and even then, you may not be able to do it.

Knowing how to count cards in blackjack allows you to control your betting based on which cards you perceive as remaining. It is a deceiving system because the logic of card counting is easy to understand, but doing it in practice is very difficult.

All card counting starts with assigning cards with a zero, positive, and negative value, all of which contribute to the Effect of Removal (EOR). As the name suggests, this provides an estimate of what impact removing a specific card will have on the house edge. 

Legality of Card Counting

One of the most interesting things about card counting is that it is not illegal. In the US, no law says you cannot count cards when playing blackjack. Other countries view it similarly, making it technically “legal” around the world. It is interesting that counting cards is not cheating, as you are not unfairly influencing the outcome of the game.

Even so, you are not going to be greeted with open arms by land-based casinos if they know you are card counting. In fact, you are likely to be thrown out if the casinos suspect you are counting. You’re free to try, but most casinos frown upon it and will ban you if you are caught.

image for card counting

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Basic Concepts of Card Counting

The fundamental knowledge you need to start card counting is understanding the card values in blackjack. If you are unfamiliar with blackjack, it is a casino card game where you play against the dealer. The objective is to get closer to 21 than the dealer without going over. You get two initial cards and can “Stand” with those two or “Hit” to receive more cards.

Each card in blackjack has a value that you add together to get a hand total. For numbers 2 through 10, the value is the number. Picture cards all have a value of 10, while the Ace counts either as 11 or 1:

CardValue
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99
1010
Jack10
Queen10
King10
Ace1 or 11
image for card counting

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Understanding the Deck

Most blackjack games use more than one deck, which is partially a response to card counting. If you do play a single-deck variant, counting cards is relatively easy as you only track 52 cards. In more common multi-deck games, you need to track more cards, which is why counting cards requires an excellent memory.

Each card in the deck is given a positive, negative, or zero value by the card counter. Which value is given depends on the card, so let’s expand on the table above to see the -/+ values for blackjack card counting:

CardValue+ or – value
22+1
33+1
44+1
55+1
66+1
770
880
990
1010-1
Jack10-1
Queen10-1
King10-1
Ace1 or 11-1

The Running Count Vs. The True Count

To track cards properly across multiple decks, counters use a running count and a true count. Both of these are important components when you learn how to count cards:

  • Running Count: At the core of card counting is the running count, which is the total value of all cards that have been dealt. So, if a 2, 5, King, and 8 are dealt, the running total for the sequence would be +1 (+1, +1, 0, -1 = +1). This is known as the running count, and if it remains positive, it means there are more high cards left in the decks. If it is negative, there are fewer high-value cards.
  • True Count: You can now find the true count by taking the running count and spreading it across all decks in the game. The running count only shows the one deck in play at that time, while the true count adjusts the number for all remaining decks. This is done by dividing the running count by the number of decks left.

Step-by-Step Guide to Counting Cards

Knowing how to count cards in blackjack adds an extra element of skill to help you control your betting during a game. Simple in concept but harder in practice, let’s apply what we know so far into a clear gameplay flow.

  • Give each card a value. You can choose your own values, but we recommend beginners stick to the traditional card counting valuations (2-6 is +1, 6-9 is 0, 10-Ace is -1). The dealer will now deal cards, and your goal is to adjust your count on each card. There is a constant Effect of Removal (EOR) for each card dealt that dictates if you bet higher or lower.

  • Maintain your running count and adjust it on each card dealt. If you learn your values well, you will only need to keep the total count in your mind and not memorize each card. A positive running count means you are gaining an advantage because more cards with a higher value remain. The negative count means you are losing your advantage.

  • At intervals in the game, divide the running count by the number of decks to find the true count. Once you know the true count, you have a much better understanding of how well you are doing. If your advantage is significant, you can increase your bets. If you are losing your advantage, consider lowering bets or stopping play completely.
image for card counting

Image credit: Aleksey Kurguzov/Shutterstock

Tips for Beginner Card Counters

We bet you are surprised by how simple card counting actually is. Even so, it does require you to spend time properly understanding how it works. Below are some tips and resources to help you master counting cards in blackjack more quickly.

  • Practice Makes Perfect: Nothing beats repetition, so the more you try card counting, the more efficient and accurate you will become. You can practice at home using your own decks of cards and simulating a game. You can also find online apps that offer automated simulations to learn card counting, while there are also books you can read to learn about different methods and techniques.
  • Master Basic Strategy: Basic blackjack strategy charts show you whether to Hit, Stand, Split, or Double on specific hand totals. For example, should you Hit or Stand if you have a 6 + 8 in your hand? Basic strategy helps you make the best gameplay decisions and is something all players should know. Combining it with card counting makes for a potent combination of safe decision-making based on statistical knowledge.
  • Learn It All: Before applying any card counting, you will need to study. Firstly, learn how to play blackjack and all card values and gameplay options. Next, make sure you properly understand what card counting is and how it works.
  • Manage Your Bankroll: It is easy to sometimes get into a trap of feeling invincible when you are counting cards. While this method can give you a lot of insight and control, counting cards does not guarantee wins. Do not chase losses and manage your budget by only using money you can afford to lose.
  • Online Card Counting: Thinking about bringing your newfound counting skills to online blackjack? That may not be possible because virtual blackjack games use random number generators, which means there are no set cards of decks – it’s all random. Live online casino games do use real cards/decks, but they are constantly being shuffled.

Advanced Card Counting Strategies

Once you know how to count cards and are confident, you may want to expand your repertoire into more advanced techniques:

Back Counting

Back counting is an alternative system where instead of counting all cards, you only focus on the cards dealt face-up. It is easier to learn, and you can apply it by following the steps below:

  1. Focus on face-up cards: Only track the cards that the casino deals face-up to you and the dealer.
  2. Track high and low cards: Track the face-up cards, keeping a simple count of the high-value (10, Jack, Queen, King, Ace) and low-value cards (2-9) that have been dealt.
  3. Adjust your bets: If more high cards have been dealt, lower your bets as your chances of a good hand are decreasing. If there are still more high cards left in the decks, consider increasing your wager as you have more chance of a good hand.

Modified Card Counting Strategies

Modified card counting strategies are different methods for card counting that focus on solving unique problems in the standard technique. For example, modifications could be adjusting card values or betting guidance. Let’s take a look at some examples of modified counting strategies:

  • Simplified systems: This methodology focuses on reducing the number of cards you need to track, such as the Back Counting system above. The Ace/Five method is another example.
  • Balanced systems: Balanced card counting attempts to reduce fluctuations in your bankroll. Instead of big bet value swings, you make more incremental bet adjustments. Try the Omega II method for a balanced counting system.
  • Insurance-based systems: Some systems may introduce insurance bets into card counting strategies.
  • Multi-deck systems: While standard card counting accounts for multiple decks, there are systems that put more focus on this challenge. The Knock-Out Count method is a notable example.
image for card counting

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

FAQs About Card Counting in Blackjack

  • Does counting cards in blackjack work?

Yes, but only to an extent. If you master basic card counting, you definitely gain more knowledge about what cards are in play and can adjust your bets accordingly. However, you never control the next card dealt, so blackjack remains a game of luck, and you cannot directly influence the outcome of your hand.

  • Is counting cards in blackjack illegal?

It is not a criminal offense to count cards, as all you are doing is keeping track of cards that have been dealt. In fact, it is not even cheating because you are not unfairly trying to trick the game to win. Even so, most casinos do not like card counting – they will dismiss you if you are caught and potentially ban you from returning.

  • What is the formula for counting cards in blackjack?

In blackjack card counting, each card is given a positive, negative, or equal value and you tally up the value based on each card that has been dealt. You then divide the “running count” by the number of decks in play to find the true count. This allows you to assess your chances of winning and adjust your bets accordingly.

]]>
Effective Online Blackjack Strategies to Improve Your Game https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/effective-online-blackjack-strategies-to-improve-your-game/ Mon, 09 Sep 2024 10:12:52 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41886 Online Blackjack Strategy: What You Need to Know
  • Explore key online blackjack strategies to enhance your gameplay experience and increase your chances of winning.
  • Understand the unique aspects of playing blackjack online, such as live dealer games and electronic interfaces.
  • Utilize tactics like basic blackjack strategy charts and card counting simulations to improve your decision-making skills.
  • Take advantage of casino bonuses and promotions offered by online casinos to boost your bankroll and extend your playing time.
  • Stay disciplined with your betting limits and practice responsible gambling habits while enjoying online blackjack.

Mastering an online blackjack strategy can give you skills to boost your odds of winning and extend your bankroll. Below, we will introduce you to the best blackjack strategies and how you can use them to increase your skill and confidence.

Online Blackjack Strategy: Key Principles

Any good online blackjack strategy starts with understanding the basics of the game and learning how to play blackjack online. The good news is that learning blackjack is a relatively easy and combines skill and luck for an exciting casino experience.

Blackjack is a card game that involves multiple decks of cards. You play directly against the dealer to try and get a hand as close to 21 as possible without going over while also having a better value than the dealer. Online blackjack is usually played on between one and eight decks of cards, and both the player and dealer start with two cards.

With those cards, you can choose to “Stand” and only use your current two cards. Alternatively, you can “Hit” and take additional cards to potentially improve your hand. Card values determine the total of your cards, with cards 2 to 10 having their face value. Picture cards (jacks, queens, Kings) are valued at 10, and Aces can be 1 or 11. If you have a hand without an Ace, this is known as a hard hand. Hands with an Ace are known as soft hands.

So, how does this all come together during a game of blackjack? Let’s take a look:

  1. A round of blackjack begins with the player placing their bet.
  2. The dealer now deals two cards to you and two cards to themselves. Both your cards will be face down, and in most variants, the dealer has one card down and one card face up.
  3. Check your cards and decide if you want to Stand or Hit.
  4. You can also make other decisions, such as Split pairs or Double Down.
  5. Most variant rules state that the dealer must Stand if they have 17 or higher and must Hit if they have less than 17.
  6. Both player and dealer reveal their cards, and the winner is the one closest to 21 without going over (Bust).

Are Blackjack Strategies Important?

Blackjack strategies are useful but not necessary to play the game. Even so, whether you are a beginner or expert, a basic blackjack strategy is helpful. The goal of an online blackjack strategy is to give you clear instructions on which gameplay choices to make for each card combination you have. In other words, a blackjack strategy tells you when to Hit, Stand, double down, split, and so on.

Common Blackjack Terms You Need To Know About

Before you start using blackjack strategies, it is important to know classic blackjack jargon you will see often:

  • Deal: When the dealer gives you the cards you will use during gameplay.
  • Hit: If you want to improve your hand, you “Hit” and receive an additional card.
  • Stand: When you are happy with your hand, you “Stand” to stick with the two cards you have.
  • Split: A pair of cards with the same values, such as two 5’s, can be “Split” and receive cards for two hands, which you must bet the same amount on.
  • Double Down: With some card combinations, you can choose to double the bet.
  • Insurance: A side bet where you receive a payout if you lose when the dealer has a face-up Ace card.
  • Hole Card: The dealer’s card that faces down is known as the Hole.
  • Up Card: The dealer’s card facing up is the Up Card.
  • Blackjack: The best winning hand, featuring an ace and a ten, jack, queen, or king (21 in total).
  • Surrender: A side bet in some variants where you can “surrender” your hand and get 50% of your bet back.
  • Bust: If you or the dealer has a hand that is over the value of 21.
image for online poker strategy

Image credit: RomanR/Shutterstock

Online Blackjack Strategy: Basic Blackjack Strategy

When using an online blackjack strategy, you will be given a set of instructions on which actions to take with specific cards/hands. In simple terms, a basic blackjack strategy shows you what to do based on the hands you have. This makes this type of plan excellent for beginners who may not be confident or even experienced players who want more structure in their game.

To make blackjack strategies easy to understand, there are blackjack charts available that simplify all the actions you need to take. Blackjack tables are easy to read, and if you learn them, you can easily make the best gameplay decisions during blackjack hands. Below is an example of a basic blackjack strategy as a chart:

Your HandDealer Card: 5Dealer Card: 6Dealer Card: 7
Hard 10DoubleDoubleDouble
Hard 11DoubleDoubleDouble
Hard 12StandStandHit

As you can see in the simple chart above, it gives clear instructions on when you should Hit, Stand, Double, or Split. You can also see that the action you take is based on the specific cards you have in your hand. If you do not use a strategy, you will be on your own making gameplay decisions on each hand.

When To Hit And Stand

Scenarios when you should Hit or Stand are extensive, but you can use the following rules as a great starting point when learning how to win online blackjack:

  • ALWAYS choose to Hit if you have 11 or lower. It is impossible to bust by taking another card, so you will only be improving your hand. Because there are more than 10 value cards (10, Jack, Queen, or King) in blackjack decks, you have a higher chance of getting one and ending on a good hand.
  • In most situations, Stand when you have a hand of 17 or higher. This is a solid value on its own, and the chances of going bust if you Hit are high. More importantly, in most online blackjack variants, the dealer must hit on 17. There is a good chance the dealer will bust while you are sitting pretty on 17+.

What About Splitting?

Two cards of identical value, known as a pair, allow you to choose the Split side bet in many blackjack variants. This is a handy option because you can split these cards into two separate hands. The dealer will now provide two additional cards on the original split pair, creating two separate hands of two cards.

You will also need to double your bet, making a matching wager on your second hand. This can be a good option because you can double your potential payout. However, the trade-off is that in many online variants of blackjack, you must stand on both your new hands.

When to split in blackjack is an important skill, and below are some guidelines to help:

  • Face Cards: If you have a pair of Jacks, Queens, Kings, or 10s, you should not split. You already have an excellent hand that is likely to win and give you a payout.
  • Aces: Two Aces have a value of 11 and 1, giving you a total of 12. You can Hit your normal hand, but we recommend splitting Aces. With 16 cards with a value of 10 in a single deck four 10s, four Jacks, four Queens, and four Kings), you have a good chance of getting a 10 and 21 on both hands.
  • 8s: Most blackjack players hate a hand of 16 made. This value is too low to Stand and high enough to make Hitting risky. If you have two 8s, split them and try to make betting hands with your new cards.

Doubling Down in Blackjack

One of the most popular blackjack side bets is the Double Down. As the name suggests, you will essentially double your bet in an attempt to win a bigger payout. You can double down on any hand, but beating online blackjack involves knowing when to double down or not:

  • If your hand is a hard 9 (no ace in the hand) and the dealer has a face-up card of 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, Double Down your bet.
  • Double Down when you have a hard hand of 10 or 11 and the dealer has a face-up card less than 10 or 11.
  • If you hold a soft hand (an ace in the hand) of 16, 17, or 18 and the dealer’s face-up card shows a 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, you can Double Down.
  • Avoid doubling your bet if your hand is over 11 or if the dealer has an Ace face up.
image for online poker strategy

Image credit: RomanR/Shutterstock

Online Blackjack Strategy: Advanced Blackjack Techniques

Online blackjack strategy can expand beyond charts into different methods and techniques for expanding your gameplay and extending your bankroll. We will cover the more popular below:

Betting Systems

While a normal blackjack strategy provides guidance on which gameplay decisions to make, betting systems tell you which betting actions to take. They give information about what size of bet you should make instead of hand strength. Although, that means that betting systems can be more unreliable.

The Martingale is perhaps the best-known blackjack betting system. It is a negative progression, which means you increase bets when you lose. Specifically, in The Martingale, you double bets on a loss and halve them on a win.

Other important betting systems for blackjack players include the Paroli (positive progression, doubling bets on consecutive wins) and the D’Alembert (negative progression, increasing/decreasing bets by a fixed amount). While betting systems are fun, they do not guarantee wins.

Card Counting

Card counting is a controversial technique that involves tracking the cards dealt in a blackjack game to gain an advantage. It has taken a mythical position in blackjack, but it is actually a real technique. Card counting is not illegal in the US, but land-based casinos still tend to ban people they catch counting cards.

Online casinos avoid the topic by using random number generators (RNGs), but live dealer blackjack can be theoretically counted. However, the live casino game shuffles and swaps decks regularly enough to make counting mostly pointless.

Card counting involves assigning values to cards and tracking the running count. A positive count suggests more high-value cards remain, while a negative count indicates more low-value cards. The true count considers the running count in relation to the remaining decks.

Surrender Strategy

Surrender in blackjack is a side bet available on some variants, allowing the player to “fold” their hand early and receive half their bet back. If your hand is terrible, you will only lose half your wager instead of all of it.

How the surrender option works:

  1. Player’s Weak Hand: When the player’s face-up card is a 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, and the dealer’s face-up is a 10 or Ace.
  2. No Further Play: Once the player surrenders, the hand finishes.

Side Bets

Blackjack purists will tell you that they dislike side bets. However, these bets are a part of many online blackjack variants, so we’ll let you decide if you enjoy them or not. Popular and common blackjack side bets include the following:

  • 21+3
  • Royal match
  • Over/under 13
  • Super sevens
  • Lucky ladies
  • Pair square

One of the important things about side bets is the compromise you make for exciting additional bets, which results in a larger house edge. If you are playing for fun, side bets are interesting. If you focus more on winning, you should avoid these types of bets.

Online Blackjack Strategy: Maximizing Wins in Online Blackjack

We put our team of expert blackjack players to work and asked them to compile the following online blackjack tips and guidelines. Below, you can make the most of online blackjack strategy and see the common pitfalls to avoid:

  • Always split pairs of 8s and Aces – Whenever you have a pair of Aces or 8s, split the deck to create two separate hands.
  • Double Down a hard 11 – You have a great chance of getting a top hand. The only exception is if the dealer must stand on a soft 17.
  • Never split 5s or 10s – A pair of 10s is a total of 20, which is a winning hand in most cases. On 5s, it is worth hitting instead of splitting.
  • Never take the Insurance bet – While it seems like a good option, the insurance bet significantly increases the house edge.
  • Avoid side bets – Side bets also increase the house edge, which is why most players do not play them.
  • Strategies are best: Using a blackjack strategy, even a basic one, provides real statistical outcomes for each hand combination.
  • Beware of betting systems: Betting systems can be fun, but they do not guarantee wins and can burn through a bankroll if they do not work.
  • Watch your bankroll: As always, play blackjack within your financial means and never gamble with money you cannot afford to lose.
image for online poker strategy

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Online Blackjack Strategy: Online Blackjack Resources

If you want to expand your blackjack knowledge further, the following resources can help:

  • Strategy Calculators: These are tools that assist players by making blackjack strategies more automated. Players input data, and the calculator uses algorithms and stats models to analyze the data and provide recommendations for potential outcomes.
  • Training Tools: Using a blackjack training tool can help you boost your hand knowledge and skills of when to Hit, Stand, Split, or Double. Tools provide practice scenarios that let you test strategies in real-game situations.
  • Recommended Reading: Check out our other detailed online blackjack strategy guides to learn how to beat online blackjack.

Online Blackjack Strategy: Frequently Asked Questions

  • Is there a strategy to online blackjack?

There can be, but it is not necessary. It is possible to play blackjack online with no strategy. However, there are online blackjack strategy methods that enhance gameplay by providing statistic-based gameplay actions and potential outcomes.

  • Is online blackjack beatable?

No, blackjack is not a “beatable” game. Yes, you can absolutely win when playing blackjack and even use strategies to increase your chances. However, blackjack is ultimately a game of luck, and the final outcome is always left to random chance.

  • Does a basic strategy work on online blackjack?

Yes, and basic blackjack strategy is arguably the best way to play the game. A basic strategy will simply instruct you on when to Hit, Stand, Split, or Double based on the specific cards you have. Information is given in an easy-to-read chart.

  • How to consistently win at blackjack?

When learning how to win on blackjack online, you’ll need to understand that blackjack is a game of luck. However, using a basic strategy can give you more control as you have better knowledge of which gameplay actions to take.

Title Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
Mastering Blackjack: Proven Tips and Strategies for Success https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/blackjack-tips-and-strategies/ Thu, 05 Sep 2024 14:29:36 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41870 Blackjack Tips: How to Improve Your Game
  • Dive into mastering blackjack by understanding key rules and embracing fundamental strategies that lay the foundation for a successful gaming experience.
  • Elevate your casino gameplay to a higher level by delving into the world of card counting techniques, a skill that seasoned players utilize to gain a statistical edge over the casino.
  • Harness the power of effective bankroll management strategies to ensure that your gaming funds are strategically allocated and safeguarded against unnecessary risks.
  • Explore the realm of advanced betting systems such as the Martingale or Paroli strategies to fine-tune your wagering approach and capitalize on favorable streaks at the blackjack table.
  • Continuously refine your blackjack skills through deliberate practice with free blackjack games, ongoing study, and adaptive gameplay strategies that evolve with your experience and insights gained from previous sessions.

Blackjack is a unique and exciting casino game that involves both skill and luck. It’s a simple game to learn, but one that requires studying and practice to master.

With that in mind, if you’re looking for proven tips and strategies on how to increase your chances of winning in blackjack, you’ve come to the right place!

This article will overview everything from basic blackjack tips to advanced strategies, money management techniques, and more. Read on to learn how to boost your success at the blackjack table.

Essential Blackjack Tips for Beginners

Before you start playing blackjack for real money, it’s essential to understand all of the basic blackjack rules. The objective of the game is to get as close to 21 without going over it and have a higher-valued total than the dealer. To do so, you have to decide when you want to hit, stand, double down, split, or exercise any of the other blackjack side bets.

Regarding basic strategy tips, there are several considerations that you should keep in mind to be a better blackjack player. Here are a few essential blackjack tips for beginners:

  • Always stand on a hard 17 or higher
  • Always stand on a total of 12 to 16 if the dealer’s upcard is 2-6
  • Double down on an 11 hand
  • Always split Aces and 8s
  • Never split 10s and 5s

If you’re playing blackjack in a live casino venue, it’s also good to learn the hand signals, as this will ensure a smoother and more immersive gambling experience. There are a handful of blackjack hand signals, so we’ll briefly cover each of them below:

  • Hit – If you want to add another card to your total, gently tap the table in front of you to signal the dealer that you want to hit.
  • Stand – If you’re content with your hand total and want to stand, wave your hand over your cards to signal to the dealer that you don’t want any additional cards.
  • Double Down – To double down, match your initial wager with the same amount of chips next to it and hold one finger up.
  • Split – If you want to split a pair, you place an additional bet matching your original wager and make a V-shape with two fingers next to your cards without touching them.
image for blackjack tips

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Advanced Blackjack Strategies

When you’ve mastered the basic blackjack tips we’ve covered above, you can confidently move to more advanced strategies. In this regard, here are a few advanced tips for playing blackjack.

Using the Basic Strategy Chart

Blackjack is a decision-driven game, so every choice you make directly impacts your success in it. Luckily, the blackjack pros who have come before us have already outlined the optimal ways of playing the game. The best way to play blackjack is to use the optimal strategy chart that helps you make the right decision in every scenario.

A basic blackjack strategy chart considers your cards and the dealer’s upcard to instruct you when to hit, stand, split, double, or surrender. Of course, even this chart can’t guarantee a win every time. But, it can statistically give your hand the best winning chances.

Learning to read a blackjack chart is fairly straightforward, and you can even bring it to the casino. Moreover, many land-based venues even sell these helpful charts in-house. With this in mind, make sure to use the right chart for the blackjack variation you’re playing and never deviate from the basic strategy.

If you’re playing online, you can even play free blackjack in demo mode. This is a great way to practice using the basic strategy chart before you start playing with real money.

Mastering Card Counting

Card counting is arguably the most appreciated advantage technique among blackjack players. And for good reason. With optimal play and a well-practiced card-counting system, you can get approximately a 1% advantage over the casino, on average.

If you’re a beginner, mastering card counting can be challenging, but it’s still possible to master simple and effective card-counting systems like Hi-Lo with some practice. With that said, while card counting is a viable technique to obtain the edge, you should be aware that casinos frown upon this, and it doesn’t work in online games.

Understanding the True Count and Its Impact

Since nearly all casinos use six to eight blackjack decks for their games, counting cards is more complex than it used to be for single-deck blackjack. Primarily, to successfully count cards, you also need to understand the true count and how it affects the blackjack house edge.

In simplest terms, the true count represents the average ratio of high to low cards remaining per deck. For instance, let’s say that the true count is +2. This means that there are two more high cards per deck than low cards, giving you a slight advantage over the casino.

image for blackjack tips

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Money Management Techniques

Apart from understanding basic and advanced blackjack strategies, knowing how to manage your money is a vital part of being successful when playing blackjack. So, to make sure you have this aspect covered as well, we’ve prepared a few helpful money management tips.

Setting a Budget and Sticking to It

Setting a blackjack bankroll is the most important part of proper money management. This bankroll should only be up to the maximum amount you can afford to lose without experiencing any financial strain.

Set a total bankroll and a session bankroll that you’ll take with you for individual gambling sessions. Creating these clear financial guidelines will enable you to enjoy your blackjack sessions without worrying about losing too much money or feeling the urge to chase losses.

Managing Wins and Losses

No matter how skilled you become at blackjack, the game still involves a significant degree of luck. This means that wins and losses are two inseparable parts of the game, and you’re bound to experience both. The key is knowing how to manage these highs and lows without letting them affect your bankroll.

The best way to manage wins and losses is to always have a long-term focus and set realistic goals you can target. Don’t let emotions guide your bets when experiencing hot and cold streaks. Always play with a clear head. Don’t allow winning streaks to make you overconfident and reckless. In the same breath, don’t get disheartened by losses and bet when you’re not composed.

Using Betting Systems Wisely

Blackjack betting systems can be a great way to ensure a systematic approach to wagering and aid in bankroll control. That is if you pick the right betting system for your bankroll and betting preferences.

There are many different betting systems you can choose from like Martingale, Fibonacci, Paroli, and others. Make sure you pick a betting system that works for you and use it wisely, but remember that even this methodical strategy won’t guarantee you wins.

Blackjack Tips: Common Blackjack Mistakes to Avoid

Since blackjack involves a skill element, it’s also possible to make mistakes that can cost you money and hinder your long-term success. Here are the most common ones beginner blackjack players make:

  • Missplaying Soft Hands – Soft hands are less likely to bust out, which causes many players, especially beginners, to often play them more recklessly. In this regard, while soft hands provide more freedom in decision-making, be careful not to misplay them and always stick to the basic blackjack strategy.

  • Ignoring Table Rules and Conditions – Playing blackjack without a complete understanding of all the rules and conditions increases your chances of making mistakes. If you’re playing online, rules are most often transparently outlined in the game info. If you’re playing in a brick-and-mortar venue, don’t hesitate to ask the dealer to explain any rule or condition you’re unsure about.

  • Over-betting and Chasing Losses – When over-betting, you’re needlessly straining your blackjack bankroll by placing larger wagers than you can afford. Moreover, if this leads to a bad run and your bankroll drains quickly, you might feel the need to chase losses. Both of these common mistakes will most often result in money loss, so you should be mindful of them and try to avoid making them.
image for blackjack tips

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Blackjack Etiquette and Best Practices

In addition to knowing helpful blackjack tips and tricks, it’s also good to know some basic etiquette and best practices you should be mindful of when at the blackjack table.

If you’re mainly playing online blackjack, you can apply some of these tips, but they primarily pertain to live casino blackjack games in brick-and-mortar venues.

Interacting with the Dealer and Other Players

Blackjack falls in the middle of the road when comparing the social aspect of casino games. It’s not as social as craps, but there is still some social aspect and interaction between participants.

With that in mind, you shouldn’t feel obligated to engage in small talk with the dealer or other players if you want to be silent and play. On the other hand, it’s completely normal to chat with others and have gambling and non-gambling conversations if they’re interested in engaging with you in this way.

Tips on Tipping

In land-based casinos, especially in the US, it’s customary to tip the dealer when you win. If you’re playing at the lowest stakes, it’s understandable not to tip, as any tip could have a noticeable impact on your EV. That said, even for bets of $5 or $10 per hand, tipping a couple of bucks after a few consecutive wins is common practice.

For players wagering at $20 minimum bet blackjack tables or higher, a customary tip is $5 to $10 or a percentage of a win. When it comes to the latter, this can be anywhere from two to five percent.

Maintaining Composure

Maintaining your composure is one of the most important pieces of blackjack etiquette, particularly when you’re playing in a land-based casino. Understanding and controlling your emotions is essential, as failing to do so can negatively affect your session and ruin the gambling experience for others at the table.

Always be courteous and respectful toward the dealer and other players. Even if you’re experiencing a losing streak, try to stay calm and not let this cause you to act impolitely or unpleasantly toward others.

image for blackjack tips

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Answering Popular Blackjack Questions

What is the Best Strategy for Blackjack?

The best blackjack strategy is outlined in a blackjack chart, which tells you exactly what move to make based on your card total and the dealer’s upcard. A blackjack strategy chart will help you make the optimal decision every time, and you can even use it when playing blackjack in land-based casinos.

How to Consistently Win at Blackjack?

If you’re looking for tips on how to win blackjack every time, it’s essential to know that there’s no way to guarantee winning when playing this card game. That said, to maximize your long-term winning chances, make sure you understand the fundamentals, practice with free blackjack, use a blackjack chart, and manage your bankroll carefully.

Is There Any Trick to Blackjack?

Blackjack is a very straightforward game, although there are a few tips you can keep in mind to play it more proficiently. Some of the basics include always standing when your hand is 12-16 and the dealer is showing 2-6. Additionally, you should always split Aces and 8s and never split 10s and 5s.

What is the 777 Rule in Blackjack?

The 777 rule in Blazing 7s Blackjack is that you win if one of your first two cards is a 7. Additionally, the payout is more generous if both of your cards are 7s and if the dealer is also showing a 7 as their upcard.

]]>
Effective Blackjack Bankroll Strategies to Boost Your Game https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/blackjack-bankroll-strategies/ Wed, 04 Sep 2024 08:56:52 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41859 Blackjack Bankroll Strategies: What Your Need to Know
  • Establish clear blackjack bankroll limits that align with your budget and gaming goals to effectively manage your gambling funds.
  • Explore advanced strategies like the Kelly Criterion or the Martingale system to enhance your betting approach and increase the potential for significant returns.
  • Implement a disciplined risk management strategy by dynamically adjusting your bet sizes based on the fluctuations in your bankroll.
  • Embrace the concept of progressive betting, a strategy that involves systematically increasing your bets after wins and decreasing them after losses.
  • Continuously evaluate and refine your bankroll strategy to remain agile and responsive to the ever-changing dynamics of blackjack gameplay.

Playing blackjack online, or at a casino, without a bankroll strategy is a surefire way to ensure you run out of money. A bankroll management strategy helps you track your money, lets you use various betting systems, and many other strategies that can result in more profitable sessions.

In this comprehensive article, we’ll help you create the most suitable blackjack bankroll for your budget, share effective blackjack strategies, and cover various basic and advanced tips for growing your bankroll.

Let’s get into it!

Understanding Your Blackjack Bankroll

Your blackjack bankroll is the amount you set aside only for playing blackjack. Proper money management is key if you want to be successful in this game. A blackjack tip many beginner players overlook the importance of setting a bankroll, this is one of the first things you should take care of before playing for real money.

With that in mind, the blackjack bankroll must be separate from all of your other finances. This should only be the amount you can afford to lose without impacting your other financial obligations in any way.

When discussing basic blackjack money management terminology, we can define two distinct types of blackjack bankrolls.

Total Bankroll vs Bet Size

The first one is your total bankroll, the sum of money you’ve set aside for playing blackjack. The second is your session bankroll. This is the amount of money you’ll use for a specific blackjack session.

Splitting your total blackjack into smaller amounts for sessions enables you to still enjoy the game without worrying about losing your entire budget during a bad session and a run of poor cards.

Additionally, you should factor in the size of your betting units, which are the fixed base amount you will wager per bet. These should be directly proportionate to your session and total bankroll. Understanding the basic terms, we can move to the first step of blackjack bankroll management – choosing the right amount based on your overall budget.

image for blackjack bankroll

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

How Much Should Your Blackjack Bankroll be?

To answer this right off the bat, there’s no universal blackjack bankroll that works for every player. However, when learning the basic blackjack rules, you can choose the right amount for yourself without a bankroll calculator or any other tool.

The easiest way to go about this is to first set the base betting unit you will use when wagering at the blackjack table.

In this first example, let’s say you plan on betting $10 per hand. Your overall blackjack bankroll should ideally be 1000x the betting unit amount, meaning $10,000 in this case. Your session bankroll should be at least 30x to 40x the betting unit amount, but ideally 100x. This means you would take $1,000 for a single session.

With these numbers in mind, it’s fairly easy to calculate the bankroll you need based on the size of the bets you want to make.

Blackjack Bankroll Management Example

For instance, let’s say that you want to set a slightly higher betting unit of $25 per blackjack round.

Using the same principle from the first example, this would mean you need 1000x your betting unit or $25,000 for your total bankroll or 30x to 100x ($750 to $2,500) for your single session bankroll.

Having a sufficient bankroll in relation to your bets minimizes the risk of losing your entire bankroll in a single session or even having a tremendously bad day in the first place.

There are many free blackjack risk of ruin calculator tools available online if you want to dig deeper into this concept, but having 1000x overall bankroll and 100x session bankroll as a rule of thumb is more than enough to start enjoying the game.

Strategies for Blackjack Bankroll Management

Setting your bankroll is just the first step. When you’ve taken care of this, several other strategies and considerations will help you manage it and make the best of the money you have.

Arguably, the most important strategic consideration regarding your bankroll pertains to the bet sizing techniques you’ll use during your session. The simplest bet sizing technique is to use a flat betting system. This involves always betting your base betting unit and never increasing or decreasing your bet size, no matter how your session is going.

That said, if you want to deviate from this basic blackjack strategy and have a more hands-on approach, you can apply a progressive betting system. When it comes to this, you can choose either positive or negative progression betting strategies.

image for blackjack bankroll

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Blackjack Betting Strategies

The core principle of positive progression betting strategies is to increase your bet size after each win and go back to the initial bet size after a loss. The most popular positive progression betting systems in blackjack include the Paroli system, the Reverse Labouchere system, and the 1-3-2-6 system.

Negative progression betting strategies have a completely different approach of increasing bet sizes after losses and decreasing them after wins. Some of the most used negative progression strategies include the Martingale strategy, the Labouchere system, the Fibonacci system, and the D’Alembert strategy.

All of these betting systems are very straightforward to implement in blackjack. You simply need to add or subtract the appropriate amount of your bets based on the result.

Tips for Sustaining and Growing Your Blackjack Bankroll

If you want to grow your blackjack bankroll over time, you can also focus on minimizing additional things that can negatively affect it. Here are a few things you should pay attention to in order to sustain and grow your blackjack bankroll:

Avoid Common Mistakes

Although blackjack is a fairly straightforward game, there are many ways to play it suboptimally through various mistakes. Here are a handful of blackjack tips for avoiding mistakes that could drain your bankroll:

When it comes to gameplay-related mistakes, a good way to practice avoiding them is to play free blackjack online and practice without risking your bankroll. Additionally, when you start playing for real money, consider using a blackjack chart to guide you on when to make what decision.

Utilize Casino Promotions and Bonuses

If you’re playing online blackjack, a great way to grow your blackjack bankroll is to take advantage of the casino bonuses and promotions that online casinos offer. From welcome offers to bonuses for regulars and VIP perks, these rewards can come in handy and provide a helpful boost to your blackjack bankroll.

With that in mind, always make sure to read the terms and conditions before claiming a casino promotion. This will enable you to know how much you need to bet and how many times you need to wager through the bonus before turning it into real money and adding it to your bankroll.

Track Your Results

Additionally, consider tracking your results, as this will give you a direct insight into how you perform at blackjack tables. Tracking your blackjack results helps you reach your goals by enabling you to adjust when you notice certain negative patterns that need changing.

This is a vital element of proper blackjack bankroll management but doesn’t have to include extensive data. It can be a simple spreadsheet covering essential information or a free phone app for tracking blackjack results.

image for blackjack bankroll

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Advanced Blackjack Bankroll Management Techniques

With all of the above in mind, no matter which strategy you use, the blackjack house edge is still against you. That said, card counting might be the only advanced strategy that can actually run the table around and give you an edge.

Through practice and mastering card counting, you can effectively get an edge of around 1% with this technique. Of course, it’s also important to consider that casinos don’t allow this, and you will likely be banned if you get caught counting cards.

Nevertheless, if you want to start counting cards, it’s essential to be aware of the variance that comes with it. The variance represents the difference between the advantage card counting produces and the actual results. Variance goes hand-in-hand with standard deviation and can dent your blackjack bankroll even when you’re playing perfectly. Factoring in these two aspects is essential to any serious player.

Sustaining and growing your blackjack bankroll is no easy task. That said, with everything we’ve covered on this page, you can rest assured that you learned the most effective blackjack bankroll strategies and tips that will help you boost your game and improve your long-term results.

Frequently Asked Questions

How Much Should I Spend on Blackjack?

There’s no set amount you should spend on blackjack, as it all depends on your overall budget. The best practice is to set aside the amount of money that you can afford to lose without enduring any financial strain from your blackjack activities.

Can I Start with a Small Bankroll?

Yes, you can start playing blackjack with a small bankroll. However, it’s essential to properly size your bets according to your bankroll. A good rule of thumb is that your bankroll should be at least 30x to 40x the size of your average bet, while many blackjack players even increase this to 100x or more.

What is the Best Way to Build a Blackjack Bankroll?

The best way to build a blackjack bankroll is to have a long-term focus. Set the bankroll amount you can afford, implement a blackjack bankroll strategy, and play patiently, applying the optimal strategy. Utilize casino bonuses whenever available to boost your blackjack bankroll.

Title Image credit: Shutterstock

]]>
What is a Flush Draw in Poker? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/poker-flush-draw/ Tue, 03 Sep 2024 09:36:28 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41835 What is a Flush Draw in Poker? What You Need to Know
  • A flush draw in online poker is when a player has four cards of the same suit and needs just one more of that suit to complete a flush.
  • Recognizing a flush draw is critical as it can potentially lead to a strong poker hand if the fifth card of the same suit is dealt.
  • There are two main types of flush draws: the “nut flush draw,” which includes the Ace of the suit, and the “non-nut flush draw,” which does not.
  • Deciding when to bet, call, or fold in a flush draw scenario depends on several factors, such as table position, pot odds, and your read on other players.
  • A flush draw strategy is a dynamic part of casino poker gameplay that requires careful assessment of risk and reward, adding an extra layer of excitement to the game.

When I used to teach beginner’s poker classes, I liked to kick-off by asking if anyone had already played poker before. A handful of people would raise their hands.

“Keep your hand up,” I’d say, “if you’ve ever heard of a royal flush.”

Everyone’s hand would remain up in the air.

“Now keep your hand up if you’ve ever hit a royal flush,” I’d ask them — and inevitably, almost everyone’s hand would drop straight down. The answer was nearly no one.

So why are we talking about ‘royal flushes’ in an article that is supposed to teach you how to play a flush draw? This is actually lesson #1 — while the promise and possibility of making a flush is always on top of every poker player’s mind, the probability of hitting one is actually much lower.

There’s a thin line between ‘flush draws’ and ‘flush dreams.’

picture for flush draw article

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

What is a Flush Draw in Poker?

Let’s start at the beginning. What is a flush draw in poker?

  • What’s a flush in Texas Hold ‘em? A flush happens when you have five cards of the same suit. For example, you could have two spades in your hand and the board has three spades.

  • What a flush draw in poker? A standard flush draw means you only need one more card to complete your flush. In this case, perhaps you have two spades in your hand and the board has two spades, meaning you only need one more spade.

Different Types of Poker Flush Draws

To truly master ‘what is a flush draw,’ you’re also going to want to understand the different variations.

  • Nut flush: a poker ‘nut flush’ is the best possible flush any player can have. Usually this means the ace-high flush, but it can also indicate a ‘straight flush,’ where five cards are the same suit but also consecutive. (Ex. 2?-3?-4?-5?-6?)
    • A ‘nut flush draw’ refers to the possibility of hitting the nut flush. You will commonly hear players say, “I flopped the nut flush draw!” The nut flush is particularly important because it can beat other players’ lower flushes. A player holding A?2? will beat a player holding K?Q? on 2?-7?-J?-5?-6? because they have hit the nut flush. This is very unlucky for Player #2, because they have hit the second-nut-flush! (One rank lower than the nut flush).

  • Runner-runner/backdoor flush: Normally people only talk about flush draws when they only need to hit one card of a suit to make their hand. But you can also hit a flush with two cards… although this is much rarer. Perhaps you have 8?9? and the flop is A?K?Q?. In order to make a flush, both of the next cards would need to be a diamond. It’s a sneaky proposition known as going for ‘runner-runner’ or a ‘backdoor’ flush draw.

Identifying Flush Draw Opportunities – Learning the Mathematics

There are three times when you can spot a flush draw opportunity: before the flop, on the flop, and on the turn.

Before The Flop

If you are dealt two cards of the same suit, you are more likely to hit a flush, right? This is true… but it’s also a trap! Beginners tend to overestimate the value of their hand when they’re dealt two ‘suited’ cards (ex. Two diamonds, two clubs, etc.)

Do NOT play any two cards simply because they are suited

As a matter of fact, ‘suited’-ness only makes your hand 2-3% better.

Playing a hand just because it’s suited will get you in lots of trouble… and cause you to lose lots of money over time. A hand like K?7? may look good, but don’t be fooled — it’s a losing proposition.

The biggest rookie mistake a new poker player can make is playing too many hands. For more on which hands you should play, take a look at one of our cheat sheets.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

On The Flop

The greatest chance you will have at making a flush is on the flop. You may even ‘flop’ a flush — but again, this is rarer than you may think.

The likelihood of flopping a flush is 1 out of 118 times.

Ouch. That’s not good. But our memories deceive us — it’s easy to think of that one time you did flop a flush, and play any two suited cards again in hopes of repeating. Don’t do it. That vast majority of the time, your cards will miss.

What you find, however, is that you don’t flop a flush… but flop a flush draw.

This is usually worth sticking around and calling a reasonable bet. What does the math say? If you’re on the flop and only need one more card to complete your flush, the likelihood of it happening on the turn or river card is 36%. That’s intriguing — especially if you can win a big pot. But don’t go broke chasing flushes.

Unless there’s an exorbitant amount of money in the middle — boosting your ‘pot odds’ — you shouldn’t gamble your whole stack trying to hit something that will complete 36% of the time at best (assuming none of the cards that make your flush will make one of your opponents an even higher hand, like a full house).

On The Turn

Let’s say you’ve made it to the turn and you still only need one more card… but now things are getting dicey. It was 36% to hit your hand on the flop because we assumed you would get to see both the turn and river card.

Now you only have one card left to save your hand — and your odds drop in half.

The likelihood now of you hitting your flush has dropped to merely 18%.

Unless you’re getting a great price to see the river card — you only need to call a very small bet — you should often fold here. Sometimes we need to cut our losses.

What about a backdoor flush draw?

If you have a backdoor flush draw on the flop, your chance of hitting it is only 4%. This is why you usually want to ignore backdoor flush draws unless you have other draws with them to improve your mathematical equity.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

How do I Use Flush Draw Math to my Strategic Advantage?

Now that we know the math, there are key gameplay adjustments we can make.

  1. Be disciplined in hand selection. Do not play a hand just because the cards are the same suit.
  2. Recognize that trying to hit flush draws is gambling (36% at best). Only call bets when you have a flush draw when you’re getting a good price — the bet size to continue is cheap, or the pot size you can win is large enough to make the gamble worth it (‘pot odds’).
  3. Play ‘in-position’. When you are ‘in-position’ during a hand, meaning you get to act last, you can often check back and see the next card for free.
  4. Learn to bluff. Even if your flush draw misses, effective bluffing can scare your opponents into a fold, and you win the hand regardless.
  5. Price-out your opponents. If you believe one of your opponents is trying to outdraw you by hitting a flush, you can bet large to make it very expensive for them.

Final Thoughts: Maximizing Your Flush Draw Opportunities

Most beginners overvalue flush draws. It’s a major leak.

If you’re new to poker, your first priority should be learning exactly which cards to play, a ‘preflop chart’, followed by grasping mathematical outcomes.

What you will find is that suited hands probably played too big a part of your game. While chasing a flush can be tempting, the odds are usually not in your favor.

There are exceptions. Sometimes the bet size is incredibly cheap, or the pot size is so enormous it’s worth the risk. As you get more sophisticated in your poker game, you will also be able to use position to your advantage and play flush draws aggressively — allowing you to bluff your way out of situations when your cards don’t hit.

As a starting point, focus on understanding the different types of flush draws and their chances of hitting so you can make smarter decisions. Be selective with your hands, only chase draws when the odds are good, and use strategic betting to your advantage (and your opponents’ detriment).

Poker is about making the right choices. Knowing when to go for a flush or when to fold can greatly impact your success… and transform your win-rate.

]]>
Blackjack Payouts: Getting The Biggest Bang For Your Buck https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/blackjack-payouts/ Thu, 29 Aug 2024 09:40:09 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41644 Blackjack Payouts: What You Need to Know
  • Blackjack payouts refer to the amount a player wins from a successful hand, often presented as a ratio like 3:2 or 6:5.
  • The standard blackjack payout for a natural 21, also known as a blackjack, is typically 3:2. This means a $10 bet would result in a $15 win.
  • Some casinos may have tables with a lower blackjack payout of 6:5, which decreases player returns and increases the house edge.
  • Other blackjack winning hands typically have a 1:1 payout, meaning if you bet $10 and win, you receive $10 plus your original bet back.
  • Understanding blackjack payouts and their impact on your overall blackjack strategy and game value is critical to successful blackjack play.

Blackjack is one of the most popular and exciting casino games in the world, with billions staked worldwide every year. It is therefore important that you get the best value and seek the games that pay out the most when you win.

The good news is that blackjack payouts are much higher than other casino games – provided you make the right plays. And you can make a huge amount of money if you play well.

Blackjack Payouts: How Are They Defined?

The RTP, or return to player, will be declared by most reputable casinos. You will find it under the help button for the game. The RTP is the amount that you would expect to get back for each pound, dollar or euro that you stake. The typical industry average for blackjack is 99.5% which is much higher than for slots or roulette.

The normal blackjack payout for a winning bet is 1:1. However, all casinos offer you the chance to double your stake when you have certain blackjack hands, always 9, 10 or 11 and often any two cards. If you win, you then get paid even money on the doubled stake, so still 1:1.

However, you only get one extra card, so you should only double when the basic blackjack strategy charts tell you to do so. But if you lose, you lose the doubled stake. Blackjack, which is an ace with any of a ten, jack, queen or king, invariably pays 3:2. So if you win, you get 1.5x?times your stake. If you stake £2 or $2, you would win an extra £3 or $3.

Image credit: Swazall/Shutterstock

Top Tip: Always Check the Blackjack Payouts

While most casinos offer 3:2 for blackjack, there are some that only pay 6:5. Naturally enough they do not advertise this on their front page, and you have to check the rules of the game to find this out.

Unless there is some reason such as a generous casino bonus to play a game that pays only 6:5 for blackjack, you should avoid those games. There are plenty that offer 3:2.

Blackjack Variations And How They Impact Payouts

American Blackjack

American blackjack differs from European blackjack because the dealer peeks when she has a ten face up to check for blackjack before any play.

If an ace is face up, insurance is offered, a bet that the dealer has a ten, paid at 2-1. You can split a pair of the same rank, usually up to four hands depending on house rules. The RTP is usually around 99.6%

European Blackjack Payouts

European blackjack is a little different. There is usually no hole card, or if there is, the dealer does not check for blackjack when she has a ten, so you can lose to a blackjack after you have doubled or split. This means that basic strategy changes.

Also the dealer stands on soft 17 which is an ace and a six, or an ace with any number of cards totaling six. Usually only two hands are allowed, so you cannot re-split if you get another pair. The blackjack payout is slightly less, around 99.5% depending on specific rules.

Progressive Blackjack Payouts

This is a side bet, rather than a separate game. You make a separate bet on the first four cards, your two and the dealer’s two.  It is usually played with six decks, but four and eight are common. You get paid out on the number of aces in those four cards, with the jackpot, which increases until it is won, paid out on four aces of the same color.

The RTP varies with the size of the jackpot. If the jackpot is low, the RTP is a paltry 45% up to the largest I have seen at 60%. That was when the jackpot in New York New York Casino was over $100,000. For the player to have an advantage on this bet, the jackpot would need to be about $2,500,000.

Spanish 21 Blackjack Payouts

Spanish 21, called Pontoon in Malaysia and Australia, the four tens are removed, but otherwise normal blackjack rules apply. There are lots of  “extras” such as bonuses for 678 and 777. Also the rules (apart from the tens being removed) are favorable in that you can double on any number of cards, and late surrender, for example. The RTP is 99.6% to about 99.2% depending on which of the many rules apply.

Image credit: Swazall/Shutterstock

Push 22 Variants

Push 22 Blackjack is a variant of blackjack in which if the dealer busts with a point total of 22, it results in a “push” rather than a win for the player. A “push” means all remaining player wagers on the table are returned as a draw, except for player blackjacks which are still paid. This specific rule significantly increases the house edge and changes the optimal strategy compared to traditional blackjack.

Blackjack Switch

This wonderful game was invented by blackjack (and backgammon) guru Geoff Hall. You play two hands and can swap the top card of each hand. That sounds like a great deal.

If you have T5 on one hand and 6J on the other hand, you would swap and now have 11 and 20, and you can double down on the 11 as well. It comes at a price, of course, and if the dealer gets 22, it will be a push against all hands which have not bust except blackjack. The expected blackjack payout is 99.4%.

Free Bet Blackjack

Another game invented by Geoff Hall which appears in US casinos and increasingly online. The player can get a free double, where he does not have to double his stake, and a free split, where he does not have to add a second stake. However, the dealer again pushes against all hands except blackjack that are still on the table when she has 22.

The return to the player is 98.9%, so this is less attractive than normal blackjack, but sometimes the game in the player’s favor when the chance of the dealer getting 22 drops, but that requires a computer to calculate.

Power Blackjack

There seem to be two version of this game, using the word power. The American version has a game where one can double and change the card he or she gets if desired.

Also one can split on any two cards, doubling the stake. The quid pro quo for the house is that if the dealer gets 22, it is a push against any hand still on the table other than blackjack.

Lightning Blackjack

This is best avoided as the correct play is often counterintuitive, with doubling down on hard totals common. The final totals 18, 19, 20, 21 and BJ get multipliers which increase your winnings by varying amounts, up to 25 times, provided you have the winning hand.  

The game states a return of 99.2% which is about right, but only with perfect play. If you don’t know the unusual actions, you will lose heavily.

Image credit: Swazall/Shutterstock

Finding The Best Returns and Blackjack Payouts

The best games depend on whether you want to play every hand, or are prepared to sit and twiddle your thumbs. The former is the single deck, multi-player game. Microgaming claim that the return to player is 99.69%.

Playing perfectly, one might even do better than that and I think the figure is nearer 99.8%. However, playing basic strategy it is about 99.5%. The game is shuffled after every hand, so there is no need to count!

Top Tip: Blackjack Insurance Can be The Right Move

The insurance bet, always of half your stake, is a bet that the dealer has Blackjack when she has an ace showing. Other sites have said “Never take insurance”, but this is wrong. Certainly it is wrong for a single-deck game.

If two of the 11 cards you can see at the start  are tens, then the insurance bet has a return of 102.4% and should be taken. The advantage for the player is greater if only one or no tens are visible. The insurance bet is often favorite in shoe games as well when the deck is replete with tens.

The Effect of Rule Changes on a Blackjack Payout

Changes in the rules affect the payout expectancy. The most common rules are probably the following, common with Evolution, Playtech and Pragmatic Play, the main providers: Evolution have six-card Charlie and Playtech has double after split.

Typical Rules in Blackjack

  • Eight Decks
  • Dealer does not check for Blackjack with a ten
  • Dealer Stands on Soft 17
  • Only One card to Split Aces
  • No Double after Split
  • Double on any two cards
  • Split to two hands only
  • One card to each hand on split aces
  • Six-Card Charlie

The RTP using the above rules is 99.50% with perfect play on a single seat with shuffling after every hand, which is usual for RNG (random number generated) games. Without the Six-Card Charlie, which means you always win if you have six cards without busting, it would be 99.29%.  The effect of reducing the number of decks from eight is as follows:

  • Single Deck       +0.51%
  • Double Deck     +0.21%
  • Four Decks        +0.05%
  • Six Decks           +0.02%

The effect of other rule changes is a bit less. Late surrender, which means that you can get half your stake back if you think you are going to lose, but only after the dealer has checked for Blackjack, is worth about 0.09%. I have not seen early surrender, which means that you can surrender if the dealer has a ten or ace showing, for quite a while, but it would be worth a whopping 0.62%!

In general, single deck games compensate by allowing a double only on 9-11 (-0.09%) and Dealer hitting soft 17 (-0.22%).  But they are still better than the multi-deck games.

Image credit: Swazall/Shutterstock

Blackjack Payouts in Shoe Games

Most Blackjack players know how to keep a running count of the number of high cards and number of low cards, the so-called hi-lo count. The aces, kings, queens, jacks and tens score -1 and the sixes, fives, fours, threes and twos score +1. The total count is divided by the number of decks remaining to give a true count. When that is greater than 1, the player has a small edge.

There are games where one does not need to play every hand, typically One Blackjack or Infinite Blackjack, which have an unlimited number of player at the table. If you play only when the count is >+1 and play perfectly you should come out ahead.

However, the casino is not stupid and, particularly in Las Vegas, they ask you to leave, or close your account online. if you are betting a significant amount, especially if you bet a large amount at counts above +5, and play perfectly!

The above was generated by my program playing perfectly over millions of hands.

Different Side Bets And Their Payouts

These are usually bad. I say usually but that does not mean we should never place them. There is a tendency among social players to bet because they have attractive amounts paid out. But they usually have a poor percentage return. They should generally only be tried with a shoe game where the number of each card fluctuates dramatically.  Let us look at some of them:

Perfect Pairs (Any pair)

This popular side bet typically pays 8-1 on the first two cards for the player being a pair, and 25-1 if they are a suited pair. The payouts vary slightly but average 95.9%.

Hot 3 (Lucky Lucky)

This is a bet on the total of the player’s two cards and dealer’s up card being equal to 19,20 or 21. There is a payout of 100-1 for 777. There is rarely an advantage for the player. The RTP is 94.6%. Lucky Lucky is a version of this with higher payouts for 777 suited, usually with six decks and a payout of around 95.3%.

21+3

The 21+3 bet on three-card poker hands for the first two cards of the player and the dealer upcard. It pays a best 100-1 for Suited Trips and again there is rarely an advantage for the player. The RTP is 96.3% so a slightly better bet than the Hot 3.

Bust It (or Buster)

This is a bet that the dealer will bust, and pays more when the dealer busts with more than three cards.  The top payout on some sites for the dealer busting with eight cards is 250-1, but some sites couple the bust with the player Blackjack and pay 5000-1.

It is very hard to calculate the chance of the dealer busting, and the return on this bet is 94.12%. If there are lots of aces, twos and threes in the deck, the chance of a bust with many cards goes up, and the bet can then be favorable.

Crazy Sevens

This is a bet on the first three cards being sevens. If the first one is a seven, you win, and you win more if the first two are both sevens, but the real payout comes from 777 suited, which pays 2000-1. This sometimes has a player advantage when there are few sevens so far in the shoe, but you need to be counting sevens! The RTP is 94.3%.

Maximize Your Blackjack RTP

Your first decision is whether to play a shoe game, when you will need to count and either to vary your bet or sit out to make money, or to play a continuous shuffling game.  If you vary your bet significantly you might hit a bad run and lose heavily. Playing for flat stakes on a single-deck game is the safer option, and the return of 99.8% is close to level.

You will often get loyalty points or free £10 or $10 bets as well. Those will dry up, however if you are level on your main bets. Whatever you do, make sure that you play when Blackjack is paid at 3:2 (or better if “I should be so lucky”, as Kylie sang).

]]>
What is a 4 Bet in Poker? A Beginner’s Poker Betting Guide https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-a-4-bet-in-poker/ Wed, 28 Aug 2024 10:16:30 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41471 What is a 4 Bet in Poker: What You Need to Know
  • A 4 bet in poker is an aggressive preflop betting move that can help you force other players to fold and claim the pot before the flop is dealt.
  • The 4 bet in poker is most commonly found in deep-stacked cash or online poker games, where the players will have a large enough chip stacks to sustain this kind of bet.
  • A 4 bet should be saved for your strongest poker hands, like pocket aces, where you are sure that a significant pre-flop bet is going to go your way.
  • The primary aim of a 4 bet in poker is to quickly force up the pot value when you’re dealt the ‘nuts’ while also forcing players with weaker hands to fold.

A 4-bet in poker is a raise that follows a 3-bet, and it is usually done before the flop. The first raise is also known as a 2-bet (although the term is rarely used). The next player raising this initial raise is making a 3-bet. Finally, if another player or the player who made the initial raise raises again, this move is called a 4-bet.

The 4-bet is a part of advanced poker strategy and not something most beginner players have in their arsenal. However, to be a winning player in the world of online gambling and move up the stakes, you need to understand the pros and cons of this aggressive move, when to use it, and how to structure it for the best results.

In this article, we’ll discuss many different aspects of a 4-bet in poker, cover what a 4 bet is, when to use it, and how it factors into your overall poker strategy.

What is a 4 Bet in Poker: The Basics

A 4-bet is primarily a preflop move, defined as a raise that follows a 3-bet. It can be done by the player making the original raise or any other player in a hand left to act after the 3-bet.

The 4-bet in poker is usually indicative of a lot of poker hand strength before the flop, signaling that the player is willing to play for their entire stack. Of course, when used correctly, this isn’t always the case, as good players will have some 4-bet bluffs in their arsenal.

Unlike 3-bet, which is a fairly common part of poker strategy, 4-bet isn’t nearly as present, largely due to the fact that many games, especially tournaments, aren’t played deep enough to warrant this move and allow players to use it and still have chips left behind.

A Poker 4 Bet Example

Let’s look at a typical poker tournament situation, similar to the WSOP, with about 60 big blinds effective. This example also applies to online games, like video poker or live dealer poker.

Player A raises to 2.5 big blinds, and the big blind player 3-bets to 9 big blinds.

Even if player A goes for a very small sizing and 4-bets to only 20 big blinds, if the big blind player calls, there will be 40 blinds in the pot, and both players will have a pot-sized bet left behind, not leaving much room for post-flop play.

For this reason, you’ll encounter a 4-bet much more frequently in deep-stacked cash games, where players have 100 or more big blinds to start a hand, allowing for much more maneuvering space.

image for article: what is a 4 bet in poker?

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

When Should You Use a 4 Bet in Poker?

As one of the strongest preflop moves, a 4-bet should be used sparingly. First and foremost, you’ll almost always want to 4-bet with your absolute best poker hand, like pocket aces and pocket kings. These are the best starting hands in, for example, live dealer casino Hold ‘Em, so your goal is always to get as much money into the pot preflop as possible.

Another good value 4-bet candidate is AK suited, as this is the strongest unpaired hand. However, when playing extremely deep (over 200 big blinds), many good players will play this hand as a call, although a lot will depend on the situation and the opponent they’re up against.

You can 4-bet your absolutely best hands against everyone. However, against very aggressive players, you can expand your 4-betting range to include other strong pocket pairs like Queens and Jacks, AQ suited, and AK off.

If you perceive your opponent’s 3-betting range as too wide, 4-betting with these hands is a +EV move, as you’ll be well ahead of them before the flop.

4 Bet Bluffing Considerations

When it comes to bluffing, there are a few things you need to consider:

  • Are you deep enough for a 4-bet bluff – As we’ve already discussed, in some scenarios, a 4-bet will commit you to the pot, and if this is the case, you should not be bluffing.
  • Is your opponent 3-betting wide enough – If they’re very tight and only 3-betting with the top of the range, it’ll be hard to come up with a profitable 4-bet bluffing range.
  • Are you comfortable playing a big pot on the flop and later streets – When you 4-bet bluff and get called, you need to be comfortable with playing a big pot and potentially pulling some expensive bluffs by the river. If your only plan is to win the pot before the flop, you’re not ready to start 4-bet bluffing.

We’ll talk about a 4-bet as a bluffing tool in a minute, but these are some things to keep in mind when figuring out whether or not to go for it, whether for value or as a bluff.

What is 4 Bet in Poker: Common Mistakes & Pitfalls to Avoid

When it comes to poker 4-bets, there are a few common poker mistakes that players fall victim to, and while it may take some experience and practice to eliminate these, it can certainly be done.

The first and perhaps the most expensive one is misjudging the opponent’s 3-betting range. Some players are quick to read their opponents as too loose, leading to them expanding what they believe is a value 4-bet range against that opponent.

The fact of the matter is, if you want to expand beyond the hands we’ve just discussed, you’ll need to have a very specific reason and have a very good read on the particular opponent. If you have a lot of history with them and know they’re capable of 3-betting with absolute trash, then you can do it, but don’t be quick to make such determinations after playing just a few dozen hands against them.

4 Bet Poker Mistakes to Avoid

Some other common mistakes players make with their 4-bets are:

  • Using too big of a sizing – When you 4-bet, you are already conveying a lot of strength. You don’t need to go huge unless there is a very specific reason for it (i.e., your opponent will call with a weak hand). Going about 2.2x the size of the 3-bet is usually more than enough to accomplish your goal while leaving you with enough chips behind to play on future streets when called.
  • 4-betting too small – Even though you’re representing a big hand, you don’t want to just click back and allow your opponent to call with their entire range. Not only are you giving them great odds, but you’re also not doing anything to try and define their range if your bet size is such that they’ll call with 100% of the hands.
  • Failing to account for other players in the hand – Before you 4-bet, especially when doing it as a bluff, you need to consider other players left to act. If there are players with short stacks behind you, you should be less inclined to bluff, as these players can easily move all in, forcing you to call with what stands to be an inferior hand.

4-Betting as a Bluffing Tool

Good players will use 4-bet bluffs as a part of their overall poker strategy, but to do so efficiently, you’ll need to develop a good understanding of this move and get a lot of experience playing against different types of players.

When it comes to 4-bet bluffing, there are two typical scenarios that come to mind:

  • Attacking players that you know 3-bet too wide
  • Attacking players 3-betting from later positions or from the blinds, where their ranges will naturally be wider

When you recognize one of these spots, you need to figure out what poker hands are good 4-bet bluff candidates. Generally speaking, like with 3-bets, these will mostly be hands containing blockers and having decent potential to flop big, such as small suited pocket aces (A2s – A5s).

To balance this out and make yourself less predictable, you’ll also want to include some other hands into your bluffing range. While there is a lot of theory behind this, some good candidates are middling-suited connectors like 78s or 89s.

These hands have good board coverage and can catch opponents off-guard, as they’ll have a hard time putting you on these types of hands in a 4-bet pot when a board comes favorable for you.

image for article: what is a 4 bet in poker?

Image Credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Value Betting Using 4-Bets

We’ve already discussed that 4-bets are primarily used as a value-betting tool. When you have a big hand before the flop, 4-bet is one of the best ways to get more money into the pot, and you shouldn’t shy away from using it to achieve this very goal.

Some hands are standard 4-bets for value almost regardless of the situation, namely:

  • AA, KK, QQ, Aks, AKo (frequently)

When you have one of these hands, you generally don’t mind getting a lot of chips into the pot before the flop is dealt. In fact, save for rare scenarios where stacks are extremely deep, these are the hands that you want to play for stacks against most opponents.

When figuring out what sizing to use, you’ll probably want to use a bigger 4-bet size with hands like AK and QQ and perhaps go smaller with AA and KK. This is simply because the latter is easier to play after the flop, and you will find more favorable boards with aces and kings.

Advanced 4-Betting Tactics

As you start incorporating more 4-bets into your play, you’ll realize there are many aspects to this part of poker strategy that aren’t covered in this article. This is because 4-bet is, by definition, a high variance move, which means you’ll end up playing more big pots.

Once you get the preflop part somewhat solved and figured out, you’ll need to dig into different post-flop aspects, figuring out when to continue with the aggression and what boards warrant checking and exercising some pot control. This can be tricky, as the natural tendency in 4-bet pots is to keep betting.

There is also a lot of meta game that goes into figuring out your 4-bet strategy, especially as you move up the stakes and encounter stronger players. What used to work at lower limits will no longer work, as these players will go beyond the fit or fold approach, even in 4-bet pots.

This shouldn’t scare you away from using 4-bets as a powerful tool that they are. With time, practice, and experience, you’ll become much better at all these different aspects, and any mistakes you make along the way are just a natural part of the learning process.

Title Image Credit: Anton27/Shutterstock

]]>
What is Punto Banco? Your Guide to This Amazing Baccarat Variation https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/punto-banco-card-game/ Tue, 27 Aug 2024 11:10:08 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41485 What is The Punto Banco Card Game? What You Need to Know!
  • Punto Banco is the most common variation of Baccarat card game.
  • The rules are clear and easy to learn, making it a great entry game for Baccarat beginners.
  • The goal of the game is to end with a card value of as close to 9 as possible.
  • If the value of your cards hits double digits, only the last digit in the total is counted as the hand value.
  • Compared to Chemin de Fer and Baccarat Banque, Punto Banco has stricter rules on when the player and banker can draw a third card.

The Punto Banco card game is one of the three main variations of the Baccarat card game that are found at an online casino. It is the best-known and most-played version which is actually very straightforward and easy to learn.

This guide will cover everything you need to know about this exciting Punto Banco Baccarat game. From basic online gambling strategies and rules to more advanced tips and mistakes you should watch out for, this comprehensive guide outlines it all.

Keep reading to learn Punto Banco in just a few minutes!

Understanding Baccarat Punto Banco

Punto Banco is one of the four main baccarat variations, along with Chemin de Fer, Baccarat Banque, and Mini Baccarat.

Like the other variations, Baccarat Punto Banco is a card game comparing the strength of different cards with three possible outcomes:

  • The Player winning the hand
  • The Banker winning the hand
  • A tie if both the Banker and the Players have the same total of points

By comparing Punto Banco vs Baccarat Banque and Chemin de Fer, we can also notice some differences between them. In the latter two variations, players can make choices and have a direct impact on the end result.

In Punto Banco, there are fixed drawing rules, meaning that the players don’t have any impact on the gameplay. The game is played with either six or eight decks.

Punto Banco Scoring

The goal of the game is to get 9 points in your hand or as close to it as possible. The Aces are worth one point, all face cards are worth ten points, and numbers have their face value.

Before the hand starts, you can bet on the Dealer or Player winning or on the tie.

Playing and Betting in Punto Banco

To help you be certain how a Punto Banco round should play out, let’s go over a quick step-by-step example:

  1. The Players Place their Bets – Every player at the table chooses their bet. Once everyone who wants to participate has made the wager, the dealer will burn the top card and deal two cards to the Player and two cards to the Banker’s hand.
  2. Comparing Hands – The Dealer compares the Player’s and Banker’s hands to see which hand has a total closer to 9. When comparing the two hands, the card totals in each hand are added. If a hand has a total of 10 or higher, the last digit in the total is counted as the hand value. For instance, if the Player’s hand is worth 15, it’s subtracted by 10, and the total is 5.
  3. The Dealer Pays Out the Winners – If you bet on the Punto (the player), you will get an even-money 1:1 payout. If you bet on Banco (the banker) and win, you will get a 19:20 payout. This is also an even-money payout minus the 5% house commission. A winning bet on a tie will get you an 8:1 payout.

Punto Banco Card Drawing Rules

Baccarat Punto Banco also has precise third-card drawing rules. For the player, this includes drawing if their total is 5 or less. If they have a 6 or 7 total, they stand. For the banker, the rules are a bit more extensive:

  • Banker stands if they have a total of 7.
  • If the banker has a total of 6, they draw if the player’s third card is a 6 or 7.
  • If the banker has a total of 5, they draw if the player’s third card is a 4, 5, 6, or 7.
  • If the banker has a total of 4, they draw if the player’s third card is a 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
  • If the banker has a total of 3, they draw unless the player’s third card is an 8.
  • Banker draws if they have a total of 2 or less.
image for Punto Banco card game

Image credit: Shutterstock

Strategies for Winning And Punto Banco Odds

Since there aren’t any variables gameplay-wise, Punto Banco baccarat strategies are simple to follow. Primarily, the Banker bet is the best one to prioritize, followed by the Player bet. Due to its high house edge and low probability, the Tie bet is best avoided.

With this in mind, also consider that different bets will come with different house edge percentages. For example, the house edge on the Player bet is 1.24%, while on the Banker bet is just 1.06%. On the other hand, the Tie bet comes with a whopping house edge of over 14%.

Balancing Your Bankroll

Besides considering this, it’s wise to set a fixed bankroll before you start playing. There’s no precise amount you should have, but the general rule of thumb is to have a total bankroll of at least 100 to 200 times the size of your average bet. Having a decent bankroll that you’re comfortable risking will put you in the best position to focus on the game without worrying about losing too much money.

Although the Punto Banco card game is very simple, you can implement various techniques for a more systematic approach to maximize your winning chances. Primarily, this includes utilizing a betting system that will optimize your bets.

Additionally, you can try capitalizing on successful streaks and minimizing the impact of losses. With that in mind, don’t try to chase patterns or overanalyze them since all of it is purely random, but this can add some fun to the game.

Common Mistakes to Avoid in The Punto Banco Game

In addition to using various strategies to optimize your results when playing Baccarat Punto Banco, it’s also useful to be aware of the most common mistakes many players make. With that in mind, here are some potential pitfalls in Punto Banco you should watch for:

  • Not Understanding the Rules – Punto Banco casino rules are fairly straightforward to learn. That said, many players make the mistake of betting without fully understanding all of the game’s rules. Make sure you understand the odds and payout percentages, especially if you want to explore some of the game’s many side bets.
  • Choosing Bets With Poor Punto Banco Odds – In line with the previous mistake, the types of bets you place will directly impact your results. For most players who want to steer towards the maximum chance of winning, the simplest Punto Banco bets, such as the Banker and the Player bet, are the best ones to stick with.
  • Betting Impulsively – This baccarat variation is exciting, and it can be easy to get carried away and play impulsively. This is why it’s crucial to always play with a clear head and not let your emotions interfere in your decision-making process when making bets.

Advanced Techniques and Approaches For Punto Banco

As you master the basics of the Punto Banco card game, you might want to explore advanced Baccarat strategies that will allow you to take a more hands-on betting approach. This primarily pertains to finding the best betting system based on your personal preferences.

There are many betting systems to choose from, so it’s essential to pick the one that works best for you. In short, advanced betting systems can be divided into two main groups.

Punto Banco Card Game Betting Systems

The first is positive progression systems, which involve increasing your wager after a win. A few examples of such betting systems are the Paroli system and the 1-3-2-6 system.

The second is negative progression systems, which dictate increasing wagers after losses. These include systems such as the Martingale, Fibonacci, D’Alembert, and Labouchere systems.

On a different note, a popular advantage technique like counting cards won’t be very effective in baccarat, especially with the Punto Banco game variation. Unlike blackjack, Punto Banco will produce very linear results, meaning that there aren’t any cards that can significantly sway the outcome in the player’s or banker’s favor.

For this reason, counting cards can theoretically produce a small advantage compared to not doing so, but not substantial enough to deliver significantly higher profitability as it can do in blackjack.

image for Punto Banco card game

Image credit: Shutterstock

FAQ Section

1. What sets Punto Banco apart from other Baccarat variations?

The main difference that separates Punto Banco from Chemin de fer and Baccarat Banque is that in the latter two variations, players can make choices during the game. In the Punto Banco casino game, this feature is absent, as the players’ moves are controlled by the cards they get dealt.

2. How can players increase their chances of success in Punto Banco?

The best way to increase your winning chances in Punto Banco is to stick with simple bets with good Punto Banco odds, such as the Player and Banker bets. Additionally, setting an objective and having a bankroll will help you play responsibly and make the most of your money.

3. Is card counting effective in Punto Banco?

No, card counting isn’t very effective in Punto Banco. Due to the game’s rules, the edge you would get by counting cards in Punto Banco is negligible. It’s better to focus on other advanced betting techniques that will help you increase your profitability.

4. Are there any specific rules or customs unique to Punto Banco?

In Punto Banco, the casino banks at all times and there are fixed drawing rules. Moreover, while the Player and Banker designations are still present, players can’t make any drawing choices, so the game is entirely chance-based.

5. How can players practice and improve their skills in Punto Banco?

After learning how to play baccarat, players can practice free baccarat online. This is the best way to improve their skills before playing it at a real money casino, as many online casinos offer the game in demo mode.

6. What are common misconceptions about Punto Banco that players should be aware of?

The most common misconception is that Punto Banco is a complex game and that it’s difficult to learn, which is far from the truth. Another popular myth surrounding casino Punto Banco is that it’s primarily for high rollers. While this was correct centuries ago when it was invented, it isn’t true today.

A Deep Dive into the Strategic Game of Punto Banco

Punto Banco is undoubtedly a glamorous and exciting game that will leave you feeling like James Bond, especially if you play it in the thrilling atmosphere of a live casino venue. Better yet, it’s a very easy game to jump into and you can already start playing it after reading this guide.

Unlike the other two main baccarat variations, Chemin de fer and Baccarat Banque, this one doesn’t require any decision-making on the player’s part. This makes it easy to play with confidence even as a beginner, as everything is entirely luck-based.

With that in mind, make sure to remember the rules, tips, and strategies we shared with you in this article. Equally as important, be aware of the common mistakes, as this will help you ensure maximum profitability when playing Punto Banco.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
What is Chemin de Fer Baccarat and How Do You Win at It? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-chemin-de-fer/ Mon, 26 Aug 2024 15:27:11 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41475 Chemin de Fer: What do You Need to Know?
  • Chemin de Fer baccarat is one of the oldest forms of baccarat still being played.
  • The aim of a round of Chemin de Fer object is to reach a total 9 with a hand of two or three cards.
  • When the card vales in Chemin de Fer baccarat reach double digits, the first digit is ignored. So the 1-9 numbered cards are worth their face value, while the the 10 and the face cards are worth zero. An ace is worth one.
  • Players bet against each other in a real money baccarat Chemin de Fer game, instead of against the dealer.
  • In the Chemin de Fer card game, the first two cards are dealt face-down, so the players don’t know which cards their opponent has.
  • Unlike standard baccarat, players take turns being the bank, with the dealer, who represents the casino, only being there to facilitate the game.
  • When the cards are revealed at the end of the round, the player with the highest total wins.

Chemin de Fer baccarat is one of the three main variations of the casino card game baccarat and is the oldest modern version played to this day. This baccarat variation shares many similarities with Punto Banco, Mini Baccarat and Baccarat Banque, but there are some differences you should know before you start playing.

Albeit not the most popular baccarat variation, Chemin de Fer is still a player favorite in many countries, especially in Europe and Latin America, and is a favorite among online baccarat players because of its quick pace.

This comprehensive Chemin de Fer guide covers everything you should know about this exciting and intriguing game.

Chemin de Fer Baccarat: Understanding The Basics

Although historians claim that the origins of baccarat date back to the 15th century, the earliest reliable information dates to 19th-century France, precisely the time and place where Chemin de Fer first emerged.

Chemin de Fer baccarat is the earliest two-person baccarat variation, as Baccarat Banque was invented as a three-person game, while Punto Banco came after.

Chemin de Fer in French stands for “railway,” referring to the fastest mode of transportation at the time. This is because the Chemin de Fer game was faster and more streamlined than similar previous versions.

Chemin de Fer rules differ from those of Punto Banco, the most popular online baccarat variation. The biggest and most significant difference is that Chemin de Fer involves a skill element. In Punto Banco, there are strict baccarat rules as to when the players can and cannot draw the third card. In Chemin de Fer, players are free to decide this on their own, meaning that their decisions directly influence the result.

Another difference that makes Chemin de Fer more complex than standard Punto Banco baccarat is that the cards are dealt face-down in this variation. This enhances the strategic element of the game, as players can’t see what the Banker’s card total is until the end of the round.

image for the chemin de fer article

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Playing, Betting, and Etiquette in a Chemin de Fer Game

Chemin de Fer has a very simple and easy-to-follow structure. That said, to make sure you understand how betting works in Chemin de Fer, here’s a quick step-by-step guide on how to play Chemin de Fer baccarat:

  1. Betting Round – Before the dealer distributes the cards, the players place their bets. This is where Chemin de Fer differs from standard baccarat. In this variation, players take turns as the Banker and play against each other instead of the house. The dealer, who represents the casino, is only there to facilitate the game and make sure everything is in order.
  2. Dealing the Cards and Drawing – The dealer will distribute two cards to the Banker and two cards to each player, all face-down. The dealer will then evaluate the totals, and the players will have the option of drawing the third card.
  3. Comparing Hands and Paying out Winners – Once all players have decided on their move, the dealer compares the final card totals. A Player hand that has a higher total than the Banker wins the bet. If the Banker’s hand is the highest-valued one, all players lose. If there’s a tie, the bets stand for the next hand.

Strategies for Winning at The Chemin de Fer Card Game

Apart from understanding how a typical Chemin de Fer baccarat round plays out, there are additional strategic considerations you should be mindful of to play more optimally. This primarily includes knowing when to hit and when to stand:

  • The optimal strategy is to accept a third card whenever you have a total of 0 to 4 and to never get a third card if you have a total of 6 or 7.
  • If you have a total of 5, you can decide either way, although most Chemin de Fer players opt for taking the third card in this situation.

In addition to the gameplay itself, your bankroll management strategy can also have a significant impact on your overall Chemin de Fer experience. It’s crucial to set a fixed bankroll for playing Chemin de Fer.

A simple rule of thumb is to have a bankroll anywhere from 100 to 200 times the size of your bets. In other words, if you’re betting $5 per round, you should have a bankroll of at least $500 to $1,000. You’ll also want to look for table stakes that fit your bankroll.

Common Mistakes to Avoid in a Chemin de Fer Baccarat Game

Just as it’s important to focus on optimal Chemin de Fer strategies, it is vital to be aware of the potentially costly mistakes that you’d want to avoid when playing this baccarat variation. With that in mind, we want to highlight a few of the most common mistakes Chemin de Fer baccarat players make:

  • Straying From Basic Baccarat Strategy – As we outlined above, Chemin de Fer has some general guidelines that help you know when to hit and when to stand. Diverging from this simple baccarat strategy is a mistake that will result in suboptimal returns over time.
  • Not Understanding Odds and Probabilities – A common mistake many beginner baccarat players make is not understanding the odds and probabilities of different bets. Knowing the relation of these two game elements is key to ensuring you make the most of your bankroll and avoid placing poor bets.
  • Chasing Wins – This mistake is particularly prevalent among beginner Chemin de Fer baccarat players. Expecting to win every hand after a prolonged losing streak or betting in hopes that fortune will turn in your favor can be one of the costliest mistakes when playing this card game. To avoid this, make sure to stick to the bankroll you set and know when to stop playing.

Advanced Techniques and Strategies

Advanced Chemin de Fer players might want to employ more sophisticated techniques that involve exploiting various patterns. When it comes to this, the two most popular advantage techniques are card counting and edge sorting.

When it comes to the latter, edge sorting can be a very effective strategy for getting an edge in Chemin de Fer. However, casinos frown upon this technique and will most likely ban you if you get caught.

On the other hand, unlike in blackjack, the house isn’t as strict when it comes to counting cards in Chemin de Fer. However, the reason for this is that card counting in Chemin de Fer isn’t very effective.

Even though Chemin de Fer players can choose when they want to take the third card, counting cards doesn’t provide any discernible edge. This is primarily because the number ten card and face cards are worth zero points, which diminishes the importance of knowing when they will be dealt.

image for the chemin de fer article

Image Credit: Clementinin/Shutterstock

Chemin de Fer Baccarat FAQ

1.   What is the Chemin de Fer meaning?

Chemin de Fer baccarat originated in 19th-century France. Translated from French, Chemin de Fer means “railway” or “railroad,” referring to the game’s sped-up gameplay compared to classic baccarat variations.

2.   How does Chemin de Fer differ from other Baccarat variations?

The main difference between Chemin de Fer and other standard baccarat versions like Punto Banco is the presence of a skill element. In Chemin de Fer, players can decide when they want to take the third card. This means that they have direct input on the outcome and don’t have to play according to strict drawing rules.

3.   Is there a strategy to consistently winning at Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

The smartest way to play the game is to use a Chemin de Fer betting system, have a dedicated gambling bankroll, and focus on betting on the Banker or the Player. That said, Chemin de Fer baccarat still involves a significant degree of luck, so no Chemin de Fer strategy is guaranteed to provide consistent profits.

4.   What are the betting limits typically associated with Chemin de Fer?

The Chemin de Fer betting limits primarily depend on the table you’re playing at. In online Chemin de Fer, this can be as low as $1 per bet. On the other end of the scale, the maximum betting limit in live casino venues and online live dealer baccarat can be several hundred dollars or more per hand with additional baccarat side bets.

5.   How can players practice and improve their skills in Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

The best way to practice Chemin de Fer is to play free baccarat online. Most online casinos offer the option of playing these real money games for free in demo mode. This enables players to practice for as long as they want before depositing money and playing for real cash.

6.   Are there any specific rules or customs unique to Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

Chemin de Fer differs from other baccarat variations like Punto Banco in that it involves more skill, as players can decide when they want to take the third card. Additionally, it differs from Baccarat Banque, where the casino always acts as the Banker.

Playing Baccarat’s Fastest Variation

Chemin de Fer is not a difficult game to learn, but it is more challenging than its more prevalent Punto Banco counterpart. This baccarat variation involves a skill element, so it requires practice and a good understanding of all of the gameplay components.

Nevertheless, with the information we’ve provided you with above, you can be certain you’ve covered every important aspect of the game.

With that in mind, before playing Chemin de Fer baccarat, make sure you understand all of the rules, set a fixed bankroll, and pick a betting strategy that works best for you. Doing this will enable you to enjoy the fun and excitement of Chemin de Fer while playing the game optimally.

Title Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
Iron Cross Craps Strategy: An In-Depth Analysis https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/iron-cross-craps/ Thu, 22 Aug 2024 13:41:12 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41578 Iron Cross Craps Strategy: What You Need to Know
  • The premise of the Iron Cross Craps strategy is that you have only one roll to win, making it a one-hit-and-down setup.
  • The Iron Cross Strategy involves placing bets on the 5, 6, and 8, along with a field bet, to cover more potential outcomes.
  • This strategy offers frequent wins, but while losses are less common, they can be more substantial.
  • The Iron Cross betting strategy works just as well in online craps as it does in a local casino.
  • Remember to set a betting limit to manage potential losses, as with all craps betting strategies. The Iron Cross is an exciting approach, but it doesn’t guarantee a win.

The Iron Cross craps strategy involves making use of the Place bets and the Field bet to give you a high chance of winning on every throw of the dice. Given the sheer number of bets and variety of possible strategies, the Iron Cross is one that’s easy to master.

In this article, we’ll review what the Iron Cross is all about and we’ll review the steps, the math, and answer the most important question: is the Iron Cross a good craps strategy to deploy in at the casino?

What is The Craps Iron Cross Strategy?

The craps Iron Cross strategy is popular because it is set up to cash in on a hot shooter. The Iron Cross craps strategy covers multiple numbers, so it produces regular, small wins. In a casino game like craps, where the house holds a small advantage, many players get more enjoyment if they can play longer and get frequent small wins instead of aiming for a unlikely jackpot win.

If that sounds like it’s a betting style that suits you, the craps Iron Cross betting method might be a good fit. You need only learn two basic bet types: Field bets and Place bets.

The goal is simple: use a combination of these two bets to cover every throw of the dice on the craps table except a 7. Specifically, we’ll use the Place bets for 5,6, and 8. Then we’ll use the Field bet for 2,3,4,9,10,11, and 12. As long as the dice don’t equal 7, you’ll make money on every throw.

Image for iron cross craps strategy bet locations

Image Credit: Shutterstock

Craps Iron Cross Strategy: Place and Field Bets Overview

Because Place and Field bets are a little bit off the beaten path in terms of craps bets, it’s good to do a quick review of the more popular bets in craps.

This baseline gives you a jumping-off point for understanding where and how the craps Iron Cross strategy differs from standard gameplay and betting approaches.

  • Pass Line/Come Bet: While these bets are not part of the Iron Cross, learning them is to understand the essential flow of the game. Most people bet on a version of the Pass Line and/or Come bets. When you place these bets, the next roll results in one of three outcomes: a 7 or 11 wins (paying even money), a 2,3, or 12 loses. In either of those two outcomes, the Pass Line/Come bet is concluded.

    However, should the first roll of a Pass Line/Come bet be any other number (4,5,6,8,9, or 10, collectively known as points) the bet changes and is now subject to a brand new set of rules. Your wager is now affected by two numbers: if the dice come 7, your Pass Line/Come bet loses, but if that point is rolled before a 7 appears, it wins and pays even money. The wager stays alive until one of those two outcomes.

We’re lumping these two bets in together because they behave the same way; the only difference is that players place Pass Line bets at the beginning of a shooter’s turn. Craps players place Come bets during the shooter’s turn.

Many players like to have wagers on several points at a time. By doing so, they stand to profit when a hot shooter comes along (someone who throws point after point without throwing a 7). Establishing points via Pass Line/Come is a valid option, but what if you don’t want to wait? Read on!

  • Place: These bets mimic the Pass Line and Come bets that have passed and are tied to point throws. That is, they win if their point appears before a 7, they lose on a 7, and are unaffected by any other throw. However, there are a few important differences.

    When you make a Place bet on a number, you’re selecting the specific point rather than taking what the dice give you, as you would on a Pass Line/Come bet. Also, that wager is active immediately on that number; there is no need to pass through the first stage of rules on Pass Line/Come (that win on 7 or 11 and lose on 2,3, or 12).  

Payouts on Place bets vary with the number you select and are another difference with Pass Line/Come bets. For 6 and 8, you win $7 for every $6 wagered. For 5 and 9, you win $7 on every $5 wagered, and for 4 and 10, you win $9 for every $5 wagered.

  • Field: this is a simple single-roll bet that pays off when the 8 least common numbers come up on the dice. Place this wager before any throw and you’ll win even money on 3,4,9,10, and 11. Most casinos will pay 2-to-1 on the Field bet if 2 or 12 appear. Field bets lose on 5,6,7, and 8.
Image for iron cross craps strategy bet locations

Image credit: AzureAD/Wikimedia Commons CC BY-SA 3.0

Executing the Craps Iron Cross Strategy 

The first part of the Iron Cross craps betting strategy involves making three simultaneous Place bets on the 5,6, and 8. Remember, Place bets stay in effect until their number hits or a 7 hits. Should any of these numbers come up your bet wins; you’ll collect your chips and re-make the bet if necessary.

Once a dealer recognizes you’re maintaining these active Place bets, they’ll only hand you your profits on a win, leaving the original wager in place as the roll continues.

Adding in the Field Bet

Once you’ve made Place bets, you’re ready for the second part of the Iron Cross craps strategy: the Field bet. This is one of the few wagers the player can make without the assistance of the craps dealers. Field bets win or lose on every throw of the dice, so be ready to replace losses.

The amount you wager depends on the minimum bet at the table. Start with the minimum bet size for the Field bet and the Place 5 bet. But you’ll want to make Place bets on the 6 and 8 in $6 increments, so these wagers will always be a little bit bigger.

For example, at a $15 minimum table, you’d place $15 bets on the Field and Place 5, then for the Place 6 and 8, you’d make $18 wagers, which is the closest multiple of 6 that meets the minimum bet requirements.

Example Craps Iron Cross Strategy Game Flow

You’re at a $10 minimum bet craps table. Here’s how an Iron Cross might play out. Note that when you win, some dealers leave your original bet alone and just slide your profits to you. If they return your original bet as well, you’ll need to remember to replace that wager before the next roll.

Before the dice are out, that is, before the stickman has pushed the dice to the shooter (which is an indication he or she is free to roll) you place a $10 wager directly onto the Field bet.

Then you take $34 in chips, push them in front of you in the Come bet area and tell the closest dealer on to place the 5,6, and 8. The dealer puts $10 on Place 5, and $12 each on Place 6 and 8.

  1. Roll is a 5. Your $10 Field wager loses; you’ll need to replace it with another $10 in chips. Your Place 6 and 8 bets are unaffected but your Place 5 bet is a winner. The dealer will slide $14 in profits to you. So far you’re ahead $4 ($14 minus the $10 on the lost Field bet.)
  2. Roll is a 2. All Place bets are safe, and your Field bet is a double winner! (Remember 2 and 12 get paid out 2-to-1). The dealer slides $20 in chips to you.
  3. Roll is an 8. The Place 5 and Place 6 are unaffected, and the Place 8 is a winner, netting you $12. Your $10 Field bet loses so you replace it. This throw earned you $2.
  4. Roll is a 10.  Place bets are unaffected. Your Field bet is a winner, netting you $10 for this throw.
  5. Roll is a 4. Place bets are unaffected and the Field nets you another $10.
  6. Roll is a 7. All four of your bets lose and are raked. For this sequence, you made $46 against $34 in wagers, resulting in a $12 profit.

Players using $10 Pass Line/Come bets to establish points would have gotten hit hard in this sequence. An initial Pass Line bet would have gone to 5, followed by a losing Come bet when the 2 appeared.

Players who kept betting the Come would have gotten $10 bets established on the 8,10, and 4 before seeing all bets wiped out by the 7 before any of the points had paid off.

Image for craps iron cross article

Image Credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Advantages of the Craps Iron Cross Strategy

If you followed the example above, you can see that best outcome is when Field numbers appear because the result is pure profit. And when the Place bets win, it’s at least enough to cover the lost Field bet. Here are some positives about the Iron Cross craps strategy:

  • Wide Coverage: With a Field bet plus Place bets on 5, 6, and 8, every outcome is covered except for 7.
  • Frequent Wins: There are 36 possible combinations using two dice; six of those result in a 7. That means when you play the Iron Cross, 30 of 36 rolls (83.3%) have a positive outcome.
  • Fun: Frequent wins makes for engaging and exciting gameplay.

Variations of the Iron Cross Craps Strategy

There are several variations of the Iron Cross strategy that players can explore:

  • Pressed Place Bets: Instead of taking your profit on a Place bet win, you can tell the dealer to “press it.” That’s craps language that indicates to the dealer that you want to use your winnings to increase the size of your bet.
  • Differential Place Bets: Because the Place 6 and 8 have a smaller house edge, some players like to bet a little more on these two bets.  At a $10 table you might have $18 each on Place 6 and 8.
  • Other Bets: Advanced players might enhance their wins on Place 6 and 8 by also betting Hard 6 and/or Hard 8 bet, which pay a bonus when the number comes up as a double (e.g. if 6 is rolled as 3-3). ?Just remember Hardway bets have a big house advantage, so they’ll add some flavor to your game, but they won’t help your odds of winning.
Image for iron cross craps strategy bet locations

Image Credit: Shutterstock

Disadvantages Of The Craps Iron Cross Strategy

While the Iron Cross strategy has several advantages, it’s no craps panacea.

  • Overall House Edge: no betting strategy or sequence can overcome a game where the individual bets have a house edge. The Iron Cross is a gameplay strategy to maximize the craps experience, but it is not a strategy that will make money in the long run.
  • Field Bet: To put a finer point on the house edge question, any strategy that relied on the Field bet should be met with skepticism. The house edge on a standard Field bet is 5.56%. However, some casinos offer 3-to-1 on either 2 or 12 (but rarely both) instead of the standard 2-to-1, cutting the edge down to 2.8%.
  • Limited Big Wins: The Iron Cross betting approach is more likely to deliver small, frequent wins versus other multi-number strategies which can deliver bigger profits on a long roll.

In a qualitative comparison, the Iron Cross strategy stands out for its frequent wins and engaging gameplay. However, quantitatively, strategies involving pass line and come bets with full odds offer a lower house edge and higher potential payouts, making them more favorable for long-term play.

Win More Stacks With The Craps Iron Cross Strategy

The Iron Cross strategy offers an engaging way to play craps, appealing to players who like seeing a steady stream of chips come their way, however small the stacks are.

While it provides a sense of momentum and excitement, it also comes with disadvantages such as the house edge and limited potential for big wins. But as long as you know the pros and cons before you play, you might just find the Iron Cross to be the perfect intersection of risk and reward!

Title Image Credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

]]>
What Is a 3 Bet in Poker And How to Factor it Into Your Poker Strategy https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-a-3-bet-in-poker/ Wed, 21 Aug 2024 13:21:24 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41448 What is a 3 Bet in Poker: What You Need to Know
  • A 3 bet is the 3rd bet in a poker round, when a player raises on the 2 bet in poker, or the initial preflop raise.
  • This happens when one player bets, another player raises, and then either the original bettor or another player makes another raise. This second raise constitutes a 3 bet
  • In Texas Hold ‘Em and Omaha Poker, the blinds are considered the first bet, which is why the second raise is a ‘3 bet’
  • For example, if one player raises to $15 before the flop, and the other player makes it $45, the player raising to $45 is making a 3-bet.
  • Preflop betting is a huge part of poker strategy. This guide will take you through exactly what poker 3 bet is, how the value of your poker hands factors into your decision making, and how to build and implement a three bet in poker strategy.

A 3 bet in online poker is a a raise made after another player has made a raise already. Although the expression is often used to describe pre-flop action, a poker 3 bet can also happen after the flop.

During a poker game, 3 betting is an important part of poker strategy, from video poker to live dealer poker, allowing players to increase their aggression levels, resulting in winning more pots when bluffing and scooping bigger pots with the best value poker hands.

Figuring out when to 3 bet in poker, how to size your 3 bet poker properly depending on a situation, and what poker hands to pick can be tricky, but it is essential on your path to becoming a successful and profitable poker player in the long run.

What is a 3 Bet in Poker: The Basics

If you’re new to the game of online poker, the definition in the introduction will give you an idea of a 3 bet is and how it works. However, the definition alone doesn’t explain what makes this bet different from other bets and why it’s so important to develop a deep understanding of this concept.

There are several main goals that we want to achieve when placing a 3 bet in poker, and we can accomplish two or more of these with a single bet:

  • Taking control of the betting – When you 3 bet in poker before the flop, players who stick around will usually call, giving you control of the betting on future streets.
  • Hand protection – When you have a strong hand, 3 bet poker helps you reduce the number of players to the flop, making it easier to realize your equity.
  • Isolating weak players – You can use 3 bet poker to target weak players and attack their raises, ensuring you play them heads-up by removing other players from the pot.
  • Making you harder to play against – If other players know that you are capable of 3 betting, they’ll be less likely to attack your blinds, and when they do, they’ll have to fight harder for the pots.

Like with every other aspect of poker strategy, such as ICM in poker, finding a good balance is crucial. You want to 3 bet at the right frequency and with the correct poker hands to make the most out of this move.

Most players don’t do it enough, but there are also those who make one of the top 10 mistakes in poker, 3 betting too often, leaving them exposed to observant opponents who’ll take advantage of this tendency.

image for what is a a 3 bet in poker

Image credit: Andrew Angelov/Shutterstock

What Does 3 Bet Mean in Poker: Purpose & Strategy of a 3 Bet in Poker

A 3 bet in poker is one of the most powerful moves when it comes to pre-flop betting. In many lower-stakes games, players don’t know how to properly respond to it, and very few have balanced 4 betting ranges. This means that a good 3 betting strategy can give you a big edge.

By attacking a pre-flop raise, you’re conveying a message that you have a strong hand, allowing you to pick up the pot right then and there or proceed to the flop with an advantage.

On high-card boards, you’ll have a range advantage, and on lower and middling boards, you’ll still have some coverage because of a balanced poker strategy that doesn’t include just the best poker hands.

When deciding whether to play 3 bet poker or not, there are a few things to look at:

  • The raiser table position – A player raising from a late position will usually have a weaker range, which means you can attack it with a wider scope of poker hands. Conversely, an early position raise conveys more strength, which should lead to a tighter 3 betting range.
  • Your hand – Your hand is important when deciding whether to 3 bet. Some of your strongest holdings will want to 3 bet almost always, while other poker hands are good candidates for light 3 bets, especially against late position openers.
  • Stack sizes – It’s important to be aware of all relevant stack sizes and poker chip values when making a pre-flop 3 bet. If there are particularly short stacks still to act or the original raiser doesn’t have many chips behind, you should usually tighten your 3 betting range.

In addition to these general considerations, you should always think about any specific reads you have on the player whose raise you’re attacking.

If you know someone to be opening a very tight range in general, you’ll want to deviate from your standard pre-flop poker strategy and skip on some of the weakest theoretically correct 3 bets. By the same token, against players who open too frequently and have a wide opening range, you should be looking for opportunities to 3 bet in poker.

That said, always try to think beyond the pre-flop. If you know someone is sticky and will often call a 3 bet to see the flop, you should increase your frequency when in position and avoid some of the marginal 3 bets when out of position.

What is 3 Bet Poker: Types of 3 Bets

We’ve already talked about some of the main goals we want to achieve when 3 betting. With these goals in mind, 3 bets can be divided into three main groups:

  • Value 3 bets – These are 3 bets done with the strongest part of our range, like big pocket pairs, AK, and AQ. What exactly our value poker 3 bet range looks like will depend on the position where the raise is coming from, and any reads we have on the player. For example, pocket 9s are a value poker 3 bet against a button open, but we can’t raise with them for value against a reasonable UTG (under the gun) raise.
  • Bluff 3 bets – Certain poker hands play very well as bluffs before the flop. Some of the best bluffing 3 bet candidates are small suited aces because of their ability to flop flush and straight draws, which allow you to put a lot of pressure on your opponent.
  • Semi-bluff 3 bets – When talking about semi-bluff 3 betting poker hands, we’re talking about post-flop situations. With certain drawing hands, you’ll want to go for a 3 bet poker to put the maximum pressure and try to win with aggression while still maintaining some equity if you get called.

What is a 3 Bet in Poker: Important Factors to Consider

Armed with the answer to ‘what is a 3 bet in poker?’ what its main goals are, and the three major types of 3 bet, we can now move on to the most important part: the implementation.

It is one thing to say that it’s good to 3 bet because it helps us improve our aggression and win more pots. It is an entirely different thing, though, to figure out when to 3-bet in poker and what are some of the most important factors to pay attention to besides the one we’ve mentioned earlier.

Poker Game Dynamics

Game dynamics will play a huge role in how you construct your 3 betting ranges. While you can use GTO charts as your starting point, you shouldn’t be following these blindly, especially in lower stakes and live games, where players often have pronounced tendencies that you can take advantage of.

When figuring out your pre-flop strategy for a particular poker table at a casino, you should first figure out how that table plays overall. Are general tendencies more passive or are they on a more aggressive side? Are players opening a lot of hands, are there many callers before the flop, etc.?

This also applies to games of online poker, live dealer poker, or video poker. The same poker strategies apply to digital games as much as local casino games.

This information will help you create an idea of what their tendencies are and what their hand ranges look like. Based on this knowledge, you can make adjustments to your 3 betting strategy, adding or removing hands and deciding if including some of the marginal poker hands makes sense or if you should stick to a tighter, more straightforward approach.

Player Stack Sizes

Likewise, you should also be aware of stack sizes, especially in tournaments, where this is one factor that changes constantly.

Perhaps the player to your left has been on a 50+ big blind stack for the entire poker tournament, but they had just lost a huge hand, and now they are down to just seven or eight big blinds. This is something you have to consider when deciding whether to 3 bet light, as you’ll be committed to calling that player’s all-in once you 3 bet.

In cash games, you won’t often have to deal with short stacks, but you should be careful when entering pots against extremely deep-stacked opponents. When 3 betting in these situations, you need to have a solid plan for future streets and a general idea of how you want to proceed in a pot when you miss or make a marginal hand.

It doesn’t take that much for a pot to balloon out of control, and it usually starts with a 3-bet before the flop, so you must always be very aware of all stack sizes and seriously consider them when making your decisions.

image for what is a a 3 bet in poker

Image credit: Vasilchenko Nikita/ Shutterstock

Common Mistakes to Avoid When 3 Betting

Playing aggressive poker at a online casino isn’t just effective. It’s also fun and exciting, so it’s not hard to fall into the trap of taking things too far. To help you avoid these situations, here are a few common mistakes and pitfalls to avoid when it comes to 3 betting:

  • 3 betting too much against early position opens – Unless you have a very specific reason to think otherwise, you should respect early position opens and only go after them with very strong poker hands. This is especially true when you are in an early position as well and have several players to act after you. Many players tend to forget about other people involved in a hand and focus only on the original opener, which can be a costly mistake to make.
  • Not balancing properly – When 3 betting, you have to make it difficult for your opponents to put you on a hand. If you’re 3 betting only with your strongest poker hands, good players will quickly pick up on it. Instead, you want to use what’s known as a “polarized” range, which includes your best hands but also a decent number of weaker hands.
  • Using a bad sizing – It’s very important to use a proper size when 3 betting. While there is no one magic number, you want to make the 3 bet big enough so that it’s not an automatic call for your opponent with their entire range. This is especially true when 3 betting out of position, as you almost never mind picking up the pot on the spot. When playing deep-stacked, good players will often use big 3 bet poker sizes to make it harder for their opponents to call and to send a clear message that if they do call, they might end up playing for the stacks by the river.

For example:

If you’re playing 200 big blinds deep and face a cutoff raise in the big blind, you will often want to 3 bet with a hand like Ah5h. But if the cutoff opens to 3 BBs (big blinds), you should 3 bet to at least 10, and maybe even 12 big blinds.

Anything smaller will make it an easy call for a player in position, and that eliminates a big part of the reason you’re 3 betting in the first place, i.e., to win the pot without going to the flop.

Advanced 3 Betting Tactics

The concept of 3 betting in poker is a vast and very important topic, so this article, as long as it is, doesn’t nearly cover all of the different angles and nuances there are to this move.

With that in mind, we’ll quickly go over some advanced 3 betting tactics that can help nudge you in the right direction as you look to improve and solidify your pre-flop strategy.

Creating a Balanced 3 Bet Poker Range

We’ve mentioned a few times in this article the importance of a balanced 3 betting range, but what does this mean exactly? There isn’t a one-fit-all answer to this question, as what your 3 betting range looks like will depend on stack sizes, positions, and player tendencies.

Generally speaking, though, you want to have a range that has your good poker hands balanced out with enough weaker hands so that your poker strategy isn’t too predictable.

For example:

If you’re 3-betting hands like AK, AQ, KQs, and pocket pairs down to pocket 10s for value, you will want to include hands like KQo, A2s – A5s, and some suited connectors into your 3 betting range to create a good balance.

Paying Attention to Poker Hand Frequencies

In addition to figuring out a solid range, you also need to think about frequencies. If a hand like KQo is in your 3-bet bluffing range, this doesn’t mean you’ll want to 3-bet with it every time. Maybe you’ll do it 70% of the time and fold it the remaining 30%. To balance this out, you’ll sometimes just call with your strongest poker hands like pocket Aces.

Combining 3 Betting With Other Post-Flop Strategies

In the ideal world, your opponents would be folding to all of your 3 bets, and you’d be printing money. In the real world, however, this doesn’t happen, and you’ll often have to play in 3 bet poker pots across multiple streets.

When devising your 3-bet poker strategy, you always need to have this in mind. The moment you make a 3 bet, you should be thinking about different scenarios and how you want to tackle them. What sort of boards will you be continuing on, what board textures are best to check on, and what, if any, opportunities there are to go for a check-raise?

When planning all this, you’ll have to think about more than just your hand. Your opponents’ ranges, tendencies, and stack sizes will play a huge role in how you devise your post-flop strategies in 3 bet poker pots, but those fall outside of scope of this particular article.

What is a 3 Bet In Poker: Your Questions Answered

  • Is a 3bet better than an open raise? – The benefits of a 3 bet in poker over an open-raise is that a 3 bet will often force players with weaker hold cards out before the flop, reducing competition for the pot. With a good 3-bet, you might also pick up the entire pot preflop, which you cannot do with an open-raise.
  • What is a linear 3 bet poker range? – A linear 3 bet range is a list of poker hands, in descending order a value, that are strong enough to 3 bet on. A linear 3 bet range is one composed exclusively of value-bets.
  • What hands should I 3bet with? – As noted, there isn’t one straight answer to this question. It will depend on table dynamics, stack sizes, and whether you’re using polarized or linear betting ranges. Familiarizing yourself with all aspects of pre-flop betting is the best way to decide on which poker hand to three bet on at any given time.

Adding 3 Bet Poker to Your Poker Strategy

A poker 3 bet is one of the most powerful weapons in a player’s pre-flop betting arsenal. Knowing when to 3 bet, what hands to do it with, and how to properly size your 3 bets to get value and deny your opponents’ equity is essential to your long-term success in poker.

While we covered many important aspects of the 3 betting poker strategy in this article, the bulk of your knowledge and understanding will come from practice and analysis. Don’t be afraid to test different things against different players and then spend some time analyzing these spots.

A little free video poker is a great way to practice your 3-betting without spending a dime!

With time and practice, you’ll be able to pick up many interesting trends and flaws in both your and your opponent’s game, allowing you to improve and perfect your 3 betting poker strategy.

When used correctly, this can be one of the most powerful tools in your toolbox. Most players, especially those new to the game, are afraid of a poker 3 bet, whether when they have to face them or when they’re the ones who should use them. Break away from this pattern, develop an understanding of this important porker strategy concept, and you’ll quickly see significant improvements in your results!

Title image credit: Bordovski Yauheni/Shutterstock

]]>
Gutshot in Poker: What is it And How to Play it? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/gutshot-in-poker/ Mon, 19 Aug 2024 09:42:23 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41330 Gutshot in Poker: What You Need to Know
  • A “gutshot” in online poker is a hand in which a player is one card short of a straight, but the missing card is in the middle, not at either end.
  • This is also known as an inside straight draw or belly buster, where the player needs to draw one of four cards to complete the straight.
  • Gutshots are considered weaker poker hands because they have fewer outs (cards that will complete the draw) compared to open-ended straight draws.
  • Betting or calling on a gutshot is often considered risky, but it can pay off if the situation is right, especially if this unexpected move can be used to mislead opponents.
  • Understanding when to pursue a gutshot — considering factors like pot odds, implied odds, and your opponents’ tendencies — can elevate your poker strategy.

If you’re playing online poker, live dealer poker or video poker, or sat at your local casino, a poker gutshot draw is the weakest one out there, as you only have four outs that can help you. Yet, many beginners, who are just starting to learn poker, tend to overestimate a single gutshot and will often put way too many chips into the middle with this type of hand.

For this reason, it’s important to talk about poker gutshot draws and explain math and other strategic considerations behind them. Generally speaking, this is not a strong hand, but if you know how to play it correctly in different situations, it can be a profitable one.

What is a Gutshot Draw in Poker?

A gutshot straight draw is a straight draw that can only be completed with a specific card (four outs). For example, on a board of 3S 4D QD, a player holding 6H 7H has a gutshot, as only a five will complete the draw and turn it into a made straight.

Another example of a gutshot draw would be holding KA QS on a 9H 3H 5C board. In this example, you need one of the four Jacks from the deck to complete your draw, and this is what it is referred to as a single gutshot.

There are also double gutshot draws, but we won’t be covering them in this article, as their math is essentially the same as for open-ended straight draws. For example, if you have 6C 9C on a 5H 7H 3C, you can complete the draw with eight cards – four 8s and four 4s, which is the same number of outs you have in an open-ended straight draw.

It is important to be aware of gutshot draws on the board and cards that can potentially complete them on turns and rivers. Poker beginners often miss these and end up paying their opponents when they hit because they fail to recognize a straight-completing card.

As already mentioned, a gutshot in poker is one of the weakest draws you can have. Your odds of making your draw from flop to turn are just 8.5%, and the odds of hitting one of the four cards you need by the river are 16.5%.

These low percentages indicate that you should never play a big bet with just a gutshot draw if you believe the only way of winning the pot is by making your hand. In these scenarios, when facing any bet that is 50% of the pot or larger, you should just fold and move on.

Interpreting Gutshots in Poker Play

For beginner players, a gutshot can be a rather confusing hand. Without understanding the math we’ve just explained, it’s hard to understand why these hands aren’t worth chasing after. After all, if you make your straight, you can get paid, right?

The problem is, compared to all other draws, a gutshot straight is the least likely one to come in. For example, an open-ended straight draw will fill in almost 32% of the time by the river. The odds of completing a flush draw are even higher at 35%.

Some of these hands, flush draws especially, also have other “backup” features, such as hitting a top pair that might also give you a winner. Gutshots usually lack these properties and hitting a top pair when you have a gutshot can often be a bad thing, as that same card could complete the opponent’s straight draw.

To illustrate, if you have 7C 8C on a 4C 6H JH board, when you improve to a top pair with an 8 on the turn, that same card completes the potential open-ended straight draw from the flop (any 5-7 combo), and depending on the action, this combination can easily be in your opponent’s range.

gutshot in poker

Image credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Playing Gutshot Draws Effectively

The first part of this article mainly focused on explaining what a gutshot is in poker and why you need to approach these hands very carefully and conservatively. However, with the right gutshot poker strategy, you can make these draws work for you.

There are a few things that you need to consider when you flop a gutshot draw:

  • Am I in or out of position?
  • Can I only win a hand by making a straight?
  • If I make my hand, will I be able to win additional chips?

First of all, when you are out of position in poker, and you have a gutshot draw, I’d say that if you believe your only options are call or fold (when facing a reasonably sized bet), you’re always better off folding. Calling to try and hit an unlikely draw out of position isn’t a profitable strategy.

Sometimes, however, a gutshot straight draw can be a perfect hand to use as a check-raise bluff. On small and relatively connected boards, you’ll often have a range advantage as a player defending from the big blind. In these spots, using gutshots as semi-bluffs can be a valid strategy.

The main idea behind the move is to get your opponent to fold as you can credibly represent a strong hand. However, if they don’t, you still have some equity to fall back on.

For example, you face a hijack open and call from the big blind with 7S 8S. The flop comes 4H 5C 9D. When you check and they continue betting, you can credibly raise, as this is the board where you’ll have more sets, two-pair, and top-pair combinations. When you do get called, you can still hit a 6 to complete your draw.

Of course, it is important to find the right balance. You aren’t supposed to check-raise with 100% of your gutshots, and when you are in position, you can often just call and see what develops on the turn or river. When and if they give up, you can take a stab at the pot, depending on the texture, player tendencies, stack sizes, etc.

gutshot in poker

Image credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Common Mistakes With Gutshot in Poker

We’ve already covered some of the most common mistakes with gutshot poker draws, but it’s good to try and list them all in one place for reference:

  • Calling big bets, especially out of position
  • Investing too much money with non-nut draws
  • Continuing in the pot when you miss your draw and hit a pair instead
  • Taking an aggressive approach when the opponent is on a very short stack
  • Not getting enough value from made draws

You need to assess every situation individually and decide what the best course of action is. It’s easy to go on autopilot and fall into the trap of playing automatically, but check-raising against an opponent who only has six or seven blinds left is usually not going to work.

Likewise, if you’re going to chase a gutshot, whether by calling or by playing aggressively, you need to have a plan to extract the maximum value when your draws come in. Because these hands do not materialize often, you must make the most out of them whenever they do.

Advanced Techniques for Handling Gutshot Draws

Successful poker players don’t look at any individual strategy in a vacuum. Instead, they study and implement it as a part of a broader game plan, and this is exactly what you should be doing with your gutshot poker strategy.

The approach of let’s call or raise and see what happens is not the correct one. Instead, you need to take a few moments to make your decision, and during that process, you’ll want to figure out how to play out the rest of the hand.

If you go for a check-raise with your gutshot, you’ll want to have a plan on what happens when different cards hit. Likewise, if you call a bet, you should have an idea of how to play out future streets.

For example, if you call with a gutshot on a 4S 5S JD board, what do you do if turn pairs a 4 or a 5? These are cards you can credibly represent, so these can be good opportunities to take over the betting lead or put in a turn check-raise.

This way, you’re not relying on just the luck of a draw to win the pot but are instead giving yourself other opportunities to take it down.

Of course, factoring in general population tendencies and any specific reads you have on a player will be very useful. You should be less inclined to take an aggressive approach against an opponent that you know is sticky and will not fold easily.

At the same time, this is the type of opponent that you want to try and make your draw against even if you aren’t getting immediate odds, as you know they’ll be willing to put more money into the middle when you hit.

These are just a few simple examples of how you can adjust your gutshot poker strategy. There are many different scenarios and many different types of players you’ll encounter, but as long as you keep in mind the basic principles of this hand, you should do just fine.

gutshot in poker

Image credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Gutshot in Poker Examples & Hand Analysis

It’s always easier to understand certain theoretical concepts when looking at real-life examples, so here’s an interesting hand played by Jonathan Little featuring a gutshot straight draw.

  • Jonathan starts off with AC 2C in the hijack and makes a standard 2.5x raise (blinds are 200/400). The button. The big blind call and the flop come 7D 4H 3C, giving him a gutshot and a backdoor flush draw.
  • After the big blind checks, he decides to continue for 1,700, and only the button calls. The turn is the 9C, bringing in the flush draw as well. This is where the backdoor potential kicks in – the hand isn’t just a gutshot, but it also has many cards that will allow it to keep betting.
  • Now Jonathan bets 2,600, and the opponent calls once again. The river is the QC, completing the flush. Little goes for a massive bet of almost 19,000 into the pot of 12,500 to really put the opponent to the test.

This is a great example of playing a gutshot aggressively all the way through, realizing the full potential of the hand, and taking advantage of favorable turn and river cards.

If, however, Jonathan had a hand like AS 2S or AS 3S in this spot, without any backdoor opportunities, he’d probably take a much more cautious route, likely checking the flop against two opponents and giving up to any reasonable aggression.

Tips for Improving Gutshot Play

There are a few different ways to improve your gutshot poker strategy, but running simulations with these scenarios and looking at the numbers that come up is probably the best one.

When you do it enough, you’ll develop an understanding of how to tackle different board textures and play from different positions, realizing how often you should be bluffing with what types of hands and what hands are best played passively.

It goes without saying that seeking tips and advice from more experienced poker-playing friends can also help immensely. Since these can be very tricky spots, don’t be afraid to pick their brains and ask them what they think, as they can open your mind to some new possibilities that you’d never think of on your own.

The Gutshot Draw Unveiled: Elevating Your Poker Game with Strategic Insights

Gutshot straight draws are one of the most frequently misplayed hands in all of poker. Beginners make the mistake of overvaluing these hands, leading them to lose a lot of chips in spots where they had absolutely no need to do so.

Hopefully, this article will help deepen your understanding of the gutshot poker strategy and teach you how to get the most out of these draws. When navigated correctly, these hands can be profitable, especially against weaker competition that won’t be able to wrap their head around your play.

Keep on playing and studying, analyze different spots, and take advantage of different poker tools to help you develop the right strategies for gutshot straight draws, and it won’t take you long to start playing better than a large percentage of players in these spots.

Title Image credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

]]>
Heads Up Poker: Mastering the Head to Head https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/heads-up-poker/ Tue, 13 Aug 2024 14:20:14 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41300 Heads Up Poker: What You Need to Know
  • Heads Up poker is a thrilling form casino game played between just two players, requiring a unique strategy and understanding of your opponent’s tendencies.
  • Position is paramount in Heads Up poker. The player on the button acts first pre-flop but last post-flop, creating strategic implications.
  • The range of poker hands you play should be wider in Heads Up poker. Even hands considered weak in full-ring games can be strong heads up.
  • Observing and adapting to your opponent’s patterns in video poker or at the casino and playing style is essential to success in a one-on-one match.
  • In Heads Up poker, aggression often pays off. Players need to be prepared to bet and raise frequently to exert pressure on their opponents.

Are you looking to play – and master – heads up poker? You’re in the right place. Brace yourself for one of the purest, most iconic, and volatile forms of No Limit Texas Hold ‘Em.

How to Play Heads Up Poker: The Basics

To get started with the poker table positions:

  • Place a ‘button’ marker in front of one player. This can be any object — an empty deck of cards box, a cup, an eraser, a lucky rabbit’s foot. As long as it’s easily visible to both players, you can use it as your button.
  • The button player will act as the ‘small blind’. Player two will act as the ‘big blind.’
  • If the game is $1/$2 for example, the player on the button would pay $1 and their opponent would pay $2 before any of the cards are dealt.
  • The button player acts first preflop, and the big blind acts last post flop.
  • Rotate the button each hand.

What is The Difference Between Heads Up Poker And Ring Games

The main differences between heads up and ring games are as follows. Typical ‘ring games’ will have a full table of players. (Online poker tables are usually six-handed and live casinos generally seat 8 or 9 players per table.)

Because you are not waiting for an entire table of people to make their decisions, heads up poker is much faster. You will see many more hands when you play heads up than when you are in a full ring game. Strategically, ring games require patience. Heads up requires aggression.

Breaking Down the Poker Jargon

‘The button player acts first preflop, and big blind acts last postflop’ — huh? What does this mean?

I’ll simplify the poker jargon for you. Here’s an example.

  1. You and your friend are playing $0.25/$0.50 heads up poker.
  2. You are on the button which is always simultaneously the small blind and pay $0.25.
  3. Your friend in the big blind pays $0.50.
  4. You are each dealt your two private hole cards face-down. In this scenario, you are dealt a fantastic pair of aces!
  5. You raise to $1.50.
  6. Your friend calls the $1.50. Since they already have $0.50 invested, they only need to contribute $1.00 more.
  7. The flop — three public, face-up community cards — is dealt. In this case, the flop reveals: 2?6?A?
  8. Wow! You’ve hit three-of-a-kind! But it’s your friend’s turn first. You must wait for them to make a decision. Your friend opts to check (no bet).
  9. Now it’s your turn. You bet $2.00.
  10. Your friend folds.

Do you see how you made the first decision before the cards were dealt? But after the cards were dealt, it was your friend’s turn first? This is the sequence of heads up poker… and then you rotate positions after the completion of the hand.

image for the article on heads up poker

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Practicing Your Heads Up Poker Skills

What if you’re thinking, ‘Help! I’m still lost!’ or ‘I don’t have any friends!’ Don’t fear — technology is here.

Free video poker is a great way to practice and learn how to play heads up poker without worrying about all the set-up, sequencing, and positioning. The apps will take care of that for you.

I highly recommend beginners start digitally when possible. A computer will deal cards at least 3x faster than a human, so you will master the gameplay mechanics at a much higher speed. You also don’t need to waste brain space on small blind/big blind logistics. These come much more intuitively when cards are automatically dealt to you and this prevent confusing mistakes.

Even if you have a friend who is excited for two player poker, you may still want to start by playing versus each other on video poker. Shuffling cards and counting bets manually gets old quickly.

Why is Heads Up Poker Strategy More Aggressive?

Good question — let’s explain this conceptually. When you are seated at a table with eight other players, there is a good chance someone has been dealt a very good hand. Perhaps even two people have. Or three. There is a high likelihood that your hand will be beat. Again, you need to best all the other players.

Compare this to when you play heads up, where you are only faced with one opponent. Is it more or less likely your hand will win?

Much more likely. Why? The reason is that you only need to beat one player as opposed to eight players.

How Does This Impact Your Poker Strategy?

Since it’s less likely to have been dealt the worst hand before the flop, you can adjust by playing a wider variety of cards. As it’s less likely for either of you to have made a very strong hand after the flop, you can call bluffs more often and bluff more yourself.

As a theoretical example, you should generally not try to bluff five people. Someone is bound to have a very strong holding. But bluffing one person? That is a much easier task. In heads up, you only need to convince one person to fold as opposed to an entire table.

Image Credit: Vlasov Yevhenii/Shutterstock

What is a ‘Good Hand’ in Heads Up Poker?

Even though the heads up poker rules are still the same, what qualifies as a ‘good hand’ differs wildly.

Building upon the section above, if you want to defeat, let’s say, three opponents, you need to feel pretty confident in your holding. You need to have really strong cards that can best multiple people.

When playing heads up, however, a measly pair is often a pretty good hand. You only need to best one other person, and their cards might not have hit anything. This means the definition of a strong hand changes. Something as simple as a pair is often good enough to beat one random hand, but rarely good enough to beat several.

A Casino Game is Not Your Home Game

A cautionary tale — before you learn how to play poker in heads up format. Many people start learning how to play poker by practicing in a two player format with their family or friends — then they go to a casino and get torn apart. They are dumbfounded as to how they keep losing.

This is because what constitutes a good hand has changed. Yes, a high pair or three-of-a-kind will probably win against your dad or sibling when playing one-on-one. But don’t be surprised when you go to a casino betting on your pair of kings — only to find your opponents flipping over straights and flushes.

Beware of learning how to play head up poker as your starting point because the threshold for a good hand is much lower. What is good enough to win against two or three players will likely not cut it versus a big group. Keep this in mind when you transition from playing heads up at your kitchen table to live at the casino.

Why Should You Learn to Play Heads Up Poker?

I hope I’ve sufficiently scared you in the previous section. Too many people lose their money and have a terrible first time transitioning to a casino because their idea of relative hand strength is skewed. They ‘overvalue’ their hands.

For this reason, I actually recommend beginners do not start by playing heads up. You can use those same apps, computer programs, and online casinos to practice playing full ring poker at home. Should you even learn to play heads up poker at all? Honestly, it depends.

If your ambition is to play recreational home games or cash games at a casino, learning how to play heads up poker may do you more harm than good. Heads up poker reinforces bad habits and false feedback that too many hands are valuable when they’re not. Playing heads up poker may lure you into a false sense of security where you overvalue your relative hand strength.

Image Credit: Vlasov Yevhenii/Shutterstock

The Benefits of Learning Heads Up Poker

There are just three major reasons why I would recommend playing heads up:

  1. People skills: Since you are only battling against one other person, you are more able to capture a ‘tell’ or get a read. (This includes playing online by the way — even when you cannot visually see your opponent, timing tells do exist.) Heads up poker can sharpen your ability to read another and maintain your own poker face.
  2. Creativity and bluff frequency: If you’re nervous about playing poker and the idea of bluffing makes your stomach drop, then heads up is a great way to practice. The lower likelihood of your opponent having a strong hand encourages you to play more creatively and make bold moves. Bluffing heads-up is less risky than in a full-ring game due to fewer players potentially holding strong hands.
  3. Tournaments: If you intend to play poker tournaments, you need to know how to play heads up. Tournaments play down to a winner —- when the field narrows to the final few players, you want to be comfortable playing in the bluffier, looser style in order to close the deal.

Taking Advantage of Heads Up Insecurities

Many local casinos have daily tournaments which will usually not play down to a winner. Instead, the players will propose a ‘chop’ — dividing the winnings proportionately by chip stack. For example, the person with the biggest stack will earn close to the first place payout.

Most players will favor a chop deal because they are afraid to play heads up. You can exploit this. They will likely not have experience or confidence in playing heads up poker. Just knowing the two basic strategic principles will give you a huge advantage:

  1. Play more hands: You are much more likely to have a good hand when faced with fewer opponents.
  2. Bluff more frequently: Your opponent is much less likely to have a hand good enough to call you with.

Lowering your threshold of what constitutes a good hand underlines all heads up strategy.

Also keep in mind that when someone proposes a chop, it’s not decided by a majority vote. Everyone at the final table could vote in favor of a chop except one person —- and the deal is off. It only takes one objection. Since so many people are insecure about playing heads up, you can use this to your advantage.

Win Without Actually Playing

I once found myself at the final table of a daily poker tournament at a local casino. With six players remaining, I was fourth in chips. The others suggested an ‘ICM’ chop, offering me a payout close to fourth place. I countered that I was happy to agree to a chop… if I was offered second-place prize money.

They laughed, then they screamed. They were furious — how could I propose such a thing? How could I be so audacious? Well, I knew that their eagerness to make a deal and resistance to playing heads up was something I could use to my advantage. A few minutes later, they reluctantly agreed.

Their fear of playing heads up and my confidence in the format allowed me to successfully drive a hard bargain, and secure a juicy second place prize.

image for the article on heads up poker

Image Credit: Blezzer/Shutterstock

Final Strategy Shift: The Math Changes

We now know that everything in heads up poker strategy is driven by the fact that it’s less likely you’re up against a strong hand. This means you should play more hands and bluff more frequently. Since your opponent will likely employ the same heads up poker strategy changes, you might want to call down their bets lighter.

You also need to be aware that the math shifts too.

When you play heads up, you want to avoid chasing too many draws like flushes or straights. The reason why is that your ‘pot odds’ are almost always going to be worse.

An Example of The Math Changing

Let’s say someone bets $10 and four people call. There is now $50 in the middle just from the flop round alone, and you are faced with a decision with a flush draw. Should you call the $10? Absolutely — you are calling $10 to win a pot of what will be over $60 (their $50 bets + your $10 + any preflop money). That’s a great price!

A flush draw will complete around 36% of the time — so you’re getting great odds to draw. (Read more on poker probabilities in my cheat sheets here or purchase my book A Girl’s Guide to Poker.)

Since more people participated in the hand, there’s more money in the middle. You are thereby more incentivized to ‘chase’ your big draw. Because if you win, you will 6x your money! That should entice you to take the 36% gamble!

But now let’s say you’re playing heads up, and your opponent has bet $10. You now have to call $10 to win a pot that so far totals maybe a little over $20 (their $10 + your $10 + preflop bets). A 2x return on your money isn’t as appealing as a 6x return now, is it? In this case, the 36% gamble doesn’t look as fun at all.

Instead focus on ‘made hands’ that are already completed rather than draws. Because, hey, as you now know, when you play heads up poker, even a pair can be pretty good.

]]>
Understanding Blackjack Pushes: The Good, Bad & The Ugly https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-a-push-in-blackjack/ Mon, 12 Aug 2024 13:35:31 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=40814 Blackjack Push: What You Need to Know
  • A push in blackjack or online blackjack signifies a draw, when both the player and dealer have hands that hold the same total points.
  • It can occur if both the player and dealer have a “blackjack” (Ace and 10-value card), or if they have equal total points from 17 to 21.
  • If a push occurs, the player’s initial bet is returned and no money is won or lost.
  • Push rules can differ among blackjack variations, casinos, and live dealer poker. Some casinos have a “dealer wins on push” rule, which is unfavorable to players.
  • Understanding a push is vital due to its impact on blackjack odds and strategy. A push situation may influence how a player chooses to play certain hands.

If you’ve ever played blackjack, you have experienced a push (where you and the dealer end up with the same hand value and so your wager is returned to you). A push can feel disappointing, but it’s an important part of the game.

This article will provide all the details you need to know.

What Is A Push In Blackjack?

Different land-based and online casinos might vary rules at their blackjack tables, but the rules around a push are the same everywhere. It’s a tie, so your initial wager is returned to you.

Here’s a gameplay example of a common push in blackjack:

  1. You place a $20 blackjack bet.
  2. You receive two cards and the dealer’s hand is one face-down (or hole card) and the other face-up.  
  3. You have 10-6, giving you a hand value of 16.
  4. The dealer’s up-card is a jack (valued at 10), so you hit (that is, take an extra card) and get a 2, giving you 18.
  5. You elect to stand.
  6. The dealer’s hole card is turned over; a 4. The dealer has 14 and must hit.
  7. The dealer gets a 2. With 16, the dealer must hit again.
  8. The dealer gets another 2 and stands by rule.
  9. You and the dealer both have 18, so it’s a push. Your initial $20 bet is returned to you.
A player Ten-Six-Deuce and dealer Jack-Four-Deuce-Deuce.

In the above scenario, your hand resulted in a push. But remember, blackjack is between individual players and the dealer. Other players might have won or lost against the dealer’s 18.

Can Other Bets Push in Blackjack?

If a player is dealt a pair and opts to split (that is, double the wager and use each card as the starting point for a new hand) each hand is played and evaluated independently.

A player being dealt two 8s should almost always split. That means placing another equal sized wager on the table and playing out each hand. If one hand drew a 10 and the other drew an ace, the former would have pushed against a dealer 18 and the latter would have won.

Some players tip dealers by placing a small additional wager on the table.  These gratuity bets share the fate of the main bet, win, lose, or push. On the other hand, side bets – increasingly popular in many casinos – either win (rarely) or lose (usually).

How To Act (with a) Natural

In blackjack, player and dealer hands are compared strictly according to their final total value, regardless of the makeup of the hand. However, the rules don’t treat all 21’s the same. Getting dealt an ace and a 10 card is known as a natural or the eponymous blackjack. Although they never face each other, natural 21’s have certain advantages over 21’s made from three or more cards.

If you’re dealt a natural and the dealer shows any card 2 through 9, you get immediately paid 3 to 2 on your initial wager (a payout rate known colloquially as time-and-a-half, a profit of $75 on a $50 wager).

Likewise, if the dealer has natural, all player hands other than a natural lose immediately. In neither case is dealer or player given a chance to hit, adding cards in hoped of drawing to 21 and pushing against the opponent’s natural. ?

Ace (hopefully not) In The Hole

With an up card of 10, the dealer uses a special mirror on the table to peek at the hole card in order to check and see if they have a natural. If the hole card is an ace, the dealer has a natural.

That card is revealed and the game is over. All player hands lose unless a player’s hand is also a natural, in which case it’s a very frustrating push.

The Unkindest Blackjack Push Of All

The chance of an ace in the hole is around 8% for the dealer. But when the dealer shows an ace, the chance of having a ten card (ten, jack, queen, or king) in the hole is around 31%.

With such a high probability of a dealer natural a special process kicks in. Before peeking, the dealer offers players holding a natural an immediate win. But there’s a catch: the payout is even money rather than time and a half.

Players declining the dealer’s offer must sweat out what comes next. The dealer peeks and if it’s not a 10 card, the hand is a winner and the player is paid off at 3 to 2. But should the dealer turn over a dreaded 10 card, it’s a natural versus natural push and the player’s perfect Blackjack hand has gone to waste. 

Here’s a gameplay sequence example:

  • You place a $50 Blackjack wager and are dealt ace/king. A natural!
  • The dealer’s up card is an ace. Argh!
  • Before peeking at the hole-card, the dealer offers you the option of taking an even money payout for a profit of $50, which you decline.
  • The dealer peeks, sees it’s a queen.
  • The dealer flips the queen to complete the natural. Instead of a $75 profit if the dealer had seen any other card in the mirror…instead of a $50 profit if the player had taken the even money payout…it’s a soul-crushing push.

Image credit: Steve Estvanik/Shutterstock

Blackjack Push Probabilities

The probability of a push on any given hand is around 8.5% overall. Here’s the breakdown by specific hand:

  • A dealer and player both getting a natural only happens once in every 429 hands, or a probability of 0.23%.
  • Player and dealer both draw to 21: 2.3%
  • Player and dealer both have 20: 2.5%
  • Player and dealer both have 19: 1.5%
  • Player and dealer both have 18: 0.7%
  • Player and dealer both have 17: 0.5%

Those probabilities are approximate; the exact numbers depend on the specifics of the game. Here are factors that can affect the probability of a push:

  • In general, fewer decks means a slightly higher push probability.
  • Overall odds of a push increase slightly where the dealer hits on soft 17.
  • Player tendencies and adherence to basic strategy can change the chance of pushes occurring. For example, players who hit (rather than stand) on soft 17 and or stand (rather than hit) on 12 versus a dealer’s Deuce will push slightly less often.

A Blackjack push is a good news/band news situation. Your hand, which may have been anywhere from decent to very good, didn’t win. But be thankful it didn’t lose either.

Hopefully you’re now better prepared to face a Blackjack push, and on your way to being a better player.

]]>
What is The Vig in Gambling and How Does it Effect Your Betting Wins? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/vig-in-gambling/ Mon, 12 Aug 2024 10:40:11 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41292 The Vig in Betting: What You Need to Know
  • The vig comes from the Russian word vyigrysh and refers to the commission charged by a sports book on all bets.
  • The vig is also known as the juice, cut, edge, or rake. In casinos, it also known as the house edge.
  • The term ‘vig’ has also entered popular culture as the periodic payment owed to a loan shark.
  • Knowing what the vig is for each sportsbook and how to calculate the vig is important to understanding how much money you stand to make on any bet.

Vig – short for vigorish – refers to the house edge that is built into every sports bet. It’s essentially a small commission that ensures the sportsbook makes money no matter the outcome of the bet. Understanding how gambling vig works is essential for making sports bets because it impacts the long-term success of your wagers.

Origin and Meaning of Vig in Gambling

Vigorish, vig, juice, cut, edge, rake; no matter what you call it, they all mean the same thing. The vig gambling term is thought to be derived from the Russian word “vyigrysh”, which means “gain” or “winnings”. According to the Oxford English Dictionary, its earliest known appearance in print was in the 1960s.

The shortened “vig” can also refer to the interest owed to a loan shark. Picture this: I borrow money from Big Tony and forget to pay back the vig. The next thing I know, he’s threatening to break my knees. Unsurprisingly, this usage was popularized by the Italian-American Mafia.

How to Calculate the Vig

Every sportsbook bet already has the vig embedded in the odds. If you’re a casual bettor, online gambling for a bit of fun, there’s no need for you to calculate the vig, especially if you’re choosing your sportsbook based on how much you like the site instead of the quality of the odds.

However, if you’re a seasoned sports wagerer who is betting for long-term profit, calculating the gambling vig can help you make informed betting choices and (hopefully) increase your overall profit. The vig can vary between sportsbooks, so it’s good practice to compare sites and opt for the lowest edge.

Below is a formula that you can use to calculate the vig yourself.

  • (Favorite odds / (Favorite odds + 100) x 100) + (100 / (Underdog odds + 100) x 100) – 100

The Vig in Online Gambling

The vig looks different at an online sportsbook compared to a casino. At a casino, it’s hidden away within the game’s RTP. You’ll need to open up and scroll through the paytable to find the RTP amount. As discussed above, the sportsbook vig is a little more obvious, as it’s embedded in the odds of every bet.

There’s not much difference between the vig at online sportsbooks/casinos and brick-and-mortar sportsbooks/casinos. Just like their digital counterparts, retail sportsbooks will build the vig into the odds. Similarly, every brick-and-mortar slot machine arrives at the casino with a built-in RTP percentage, while games like American Roulette and Caribbean Stud also have a predetermined RTP.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Types of Vig in Gambling

Spread Betting Vig

A spread bet is the difference in the predicted points between two teams. The favorite is represented by a minus number, and has to score more than the spread for your bet to win. Meanwhile, the underdog has a plus and must lose within this number of points or win. Spreads on games like baseball often have a decimal (0.5) to avoid pushes, as many baseball games end with less than two runs between the teams.

Spread bets differ from over/unders as they focus on the difference in points between the two teams rather than predicting if the total number of points scored will be above or below the specified threshold. The spread bet vig is built into the odds, which typically range from -120 to +100. It’s important to remember that the odds and the spread are two separate entities.

Moneyline Vig

A moneyline is a bet on the result of the game. Since there is only one possible outcome – a win or a loss – they are one of the most straightforward sports bets available. Like all other bet types, the moneyline vig is built into the odds.

Though moneyline bets are perhaps the most simple, research has proven that they can also be the most efficient and prosperous. Since you’re wagering on a pretty black-or-white outcome, odds for moneyline bets – which already have the vig included – can be crazy, with some underdogs reaching into the thousands.

Sportsbook Vig

Every sportsbook bet incorporates a vig. The vig, to both the sportsbook and its bettors, is the most important part of the operation. It can determine whether or not you can sustain a long-term profit, and it ensures that the sportsbook doesn’t lose money when bettors win big.

Casino Vig

It’s very unlikely that you’ll come across the term “vig” at an online casino. Instead, casinos use the phrase “house edge” to describe the advantage that the house has over the bettor. Unlike a sportsbook vig, which is determined by the sportsbook itself, the house edge is already built into the game by the software developer.

Every game has a house edge, whether you’re playing slots, blackjack, or roulette. Most casino players are familiar with the Return to Player (RTP) percentage, which is the theoretical amount the casino will return to players over thousands of slot spins or game rounds. The RTP reflects the player’s perspective on how much they may win back, and the house edge is the remaining percentage. For example, if I select a game with a 95% RTP, then the house edge is 5%.

Image credit: New Africa/Shutterstock

Impact of Vig on Gambling

Not all sportsbooks will apply the same vig to the same bet; you’ll often find a noticeable difference between sites. That’s why it’s important to understand exactly how big of an impact vig can have on your bet. Don’t take it for granted that you’ll earn the same amount from every sportsbook!

The vig is a consequential factor to consider if you’re betting with a strategy. Let’s take a look at how different vigs can impact a $100 wager.

  • +100 odds = $100 potential profit
  • -105 odds = $95.24 potential profit
  • -110 odds = $90.91 potential profit
  • -115 odds = $86.98 potential profit
  • -120 odds = $83.33 potential profit
  • -125 odds = $80 potential profit

Strategies to Mitigate the Vig

Unfortunately, you can’t escape the vig. Just like you pay for goods in a shop, you’ve got to pay the sportsbook for the pleasure of using its platform. Ultimately, players must accept that it’s an inherent and unavoidable part of sports betting.

That said, there are some strategies you can implement that might help you lower the financial impact of the vig.

  • Compare lines across sportsbooks. For example, let’s say I see two sportsbooks offering the same bet, but one has +115 odds, and the other has +120. I’ll get $5 more for betting with the second sportsbook if my $100 bet pays out. Though it’s only five bucks, these little differences can have a big impact over time.
  • Look for reduced vig. Sportsbooks often run reduced vig promotions during popular games to draw bettors away from their competitors. Seeking out these reduced vig offers can lessen the sportsbook’s cut of your wager.
  • Improve your win rate. This one sounds like a no-brainer, and obviously, it’s impossible to guarantee a win every time. But by improving your win rate – even on smaller bets with only a few cents or dollars of profit – you will end up at the stage where you’re beating the vig.
  • Claim a bonus. Beyond reduced vig, most sportsbooks, like online casinos, offer a range of promotions like bonus bets, odds boosts, bet insurance, and more. Claiming a bonus will allow you to try bigger bets and score bigger wins. They’ll also give beginners the opportunity to try wagering and understand the vig before spending real cash.

Unlocking the Vig: How It Shapes the Dynamics of Gambling

All in all, vig is a very significant part of the gambling landscape. Looming over your shoulder like Monday morning on a Sunday night, the vig is an unwanted but inescapable part of your sportsbook experience. You can’t run, you can’t hide – the vig will always be there.

Therefore, it’s essential to implement a few tactics to keep its impact to a minimum. Comparing lines across different sportsbooks, searching for reduced vig offers, and keeping your eye out for sportsbook promotions will help mitigate the vig in the long run. Hopefully, this page has cleared up the big question of what does vig mean in gambling.

Title Image credit: Wpaddington/Shutterstock

]]>
GTO Poker vs Exploitative Poker: Which Is Better? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/gto-poker-strategy/ Fri, 09 Aug 2024 12:43:13 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=24554 GTO Poker vs Exploitative Poker Play: The Essentials
  • GTO Poker (Game Theory Optimal) and Exploitative Poker are two prominent strategies employed by professionals in both live and online poker. Both have distinct advantages depending on the situations and opponents.
  • GTO Poker leverages mathematical models and game theory to make optimal decisions in every situation. It aims to create strategies that are unexploitable even by skilled opponents.
  • Exploitative Poker, on the other hand, focuses on taking advantage of the opponents’ weaknesses and tendencies. It relies heavily on observing patterns in opponents’ play and then tailoring your strategy accordingly.
  • The choice between the two often depends on the player’s skills, understanding of the game, and most importantly, the playing style of their opponents. A balanced approach can often be most beneficial.
  • Ultimately, neither strategy is inherently “better”, but understanding and being able to implement both can give a player a substantial edge in diverse poker scenarios.

When thinking about the best approach to winning poker, there seems to be a lot of confusion about what Game Theory Optimal (GTO) in poker is, and whether it’s a better option than exploitative play in poker.

In reality, you don’t need to choose one of these options, but rather understand the basic principles of GTO play and when it should be applied.

In this article, I’ll try to go over every important detail to clear up any confusion, and I’ll start by explaining what GTO is and how it works in real-life scenarios.

What is GTO Poker?

Let’s start with the basics: What is GTO poker?

Game Theory Optimal (GTO) is basically when you attempt to play mathematically perfect poker, so that your opponents make mistakes against you. This strategy balances your value hands and poker bluffs in a way that leaves you unexploitable. 

Since the phrase has the word ‘optimal’ in it, people often think that GTO in poker is a perfect approach that is better than anything else out there. But that’s not always true.

First of all, the GTO poker model revolves around the style of play that makes you unexploitable.

It means that if you were playing a true Game Theory Optimal, your opponents couldn’t find any way to take advantage of your style. No matter what they do. At best, they could break even.

On the flip side, though, the GTO poker approach is fairly rigid as it doesn’t allow for any adjustments. You’ll be following the same strategy against all opponents no matter what they do. So, while you can’t be exploited, you won’t be exploiting others, either.

GTO is often used in poker played in online casinos, because games like live dealer poker or video poker makes it harder to read your opponents.

The best way to explain this is through a simple example. If the GTO poker model dictates that perfect 3-bet size in a certain scenario is 13 big blinds, you’ll be 3-betting to that size regardless of who your opponent is.

Even if you’re up against a loose maniac who’ll gladly call a 30 big blind 3-bet when you have pocket Aces, you’ll not deviate from your standard strategy, and leave money at the table against that particular player.

So, clearly, there are some upsides and downsides to this approach, but before jumping into the details, I want to address another topic.

No-Limit Hold’em Hasn’t Been Solved Yet

If you hear the word ‘optimal’, you immediately think of something perfect. However, there is still no such thing as a perfect poker strategy. No-Limit Hold’em is a game with many variables, and is yet to be solved, especially in non-heads up games.

Besides, even if there were a complete solution to NLHE, it would be way too complex to memorize for a normal human being. There is absolutely no way you could learn by heart what to do in every single situation.

If you had that kind of memory, you could probably earn much more money doing something else instead of playing poker.

So, GTO is very useful for learning basic principles and understanding why certain plays make sense. It’s good for building a solid strategy that you can implement against tough opponents.

But it’s not necessarily the best way to play poker in every possible scenario.

The Main Issues With GTO in Poker

Person studying poker books

The biggest problem that comes to mind when talking about GTO poker is actually learning it.

If you want to adopt this style of play, you’ll have to spend many hours analyzing different situations, working with solvers, reading strategy books and watching training videos.

But you won’t be able to remember all of that information and play a GTO strategy all the time.

However, this doesn’t mean that you shouldn’t study a mathematical-based approach. It can help you learn a fundamentally sound strategy for almost all scenarios, and is the perfect starting point against any competition.

That being said, GTO in poker isn’t always the most profitable one because it doesn’t take into account players’ stats, tendencies, or reads in live games.

For example, if you’re up against a very loose player who opens many hands preflop or makes huge c-bets on flops every time, playing GTO in poker won’t make much money against this particular opponent. You need to adjust to their style and take advantage of their mistakes.

Of course, you’d still be winning by sticking to GTO in this scenario, just not as much as you could.

Exploitative Play in Poker: Reading Into People’s Tendencies

The exploitative play in live poker has been around for much longer. In fact, some of the best in the game had used this style to win heaps of money over the years, long before the idea of GTO poker took hold.

It’s important to understand that exploitative play still means you have to play very strategically sound and solid poker. You still have to make good hand selection before the flop, be mindful of your position, and pay attention to pot odds.

But then you go one step beyond.

This is a style of play where you open yourself to being exploited but make more money by targeting your opponent’s mistakes instead of balancing your ranges.

Many weaker players are unable to readjust to these changes, so playing a GTO style against such an opponent would mean leaving money on the table.

Example of Poker Exploitative Play

Let’s look at an extreme example.

You sit down at a 2/5 table, and you don’t know any of the players, but you saw that one guy open-shoved five times in a row. Two times he got looked up and showed ATo and T9s. You can now be pretty certain this player is here to gamble.

This is where GTO considerations go out of the window, and you snap them off with pocket tens, AQo, or even weaker holdings. Their showing range is just so wide that it makes no sense to stick to GTO and keep folding as if they were playing normal ranges.

The same applies to a completely contrasting scenario.

If you’re up against an ultimate nit who never bets big without the nuts, you can safely fold even some of your strongest hands when facing such bets on the river from this particular opponent.

While this would open you up to being exploited by competent players, it’s fine to do against someone who pretty much has just one gear.

Of course, situations are rarely this clear cut in real life.

Sometimes, you can make bad assumptions or misread the situation and only hurt yourself trying to adopt exploitative play.

So when you’re not sure how to exploit your opponents, GTO play is your best option.

Are Poker GTO And Exploitative Poker Mutually Exclusive?

There also seems to be some confusion among players about having to choose either one or the other style and stick to it, which is completely false.  

As already mentioned, learning GTO basics is vital for learning solid poker strategy foundations.

After all, if you’re going to vary your styles and exploit your opponents, you need to understand where they’re making mistakes, which you can’t do without knowing the right strategy yourself.

Learning GTO (at least to some extent) is also very useful for situations where you find yourself at tough tables or against unknown players. For example, you could be seated at a tough table in a poker tournament with players that are better than you.

Here, resorting to GTO might be your best option as an exploitative poker strategy would probably hurt your chances of winning.

So, these two concepts are not mutually exclusive, and, ideally, you’ll want to learn both.

This will make you a much tougher opponent overall as you’ll be prepared to tackle different scenarios and able to adjust to new situations at the tables. Once again, you don’t need to try and learn the entire GTO by heart.

It would be an overkill and pretty much impossible to do. What you want to do instead is analyze some frequent scenarios to understand the balanced play in these spots.

This should give you a pretty accurate idea of what to do in similar situations to keep your ranges balanced and your play close to GTO.

More On Exploitative Poker Play: Adjusting & Readjusting

Poker table with maths symbols drawn all over it

Like game theory optimal strategy the exploitative approach has its drawbacks, too.

While GTO has its foundations hardcore math, poker exploitative play is more about guessing your opponent’s tendencies. As you probably know, conclusions made at a poker table aren’t always perfect or even correct at all.

Earlier in this article, I gave an extreme example where switching to an exploitative approach would be +EV.

But, in real life, things usually aren’t as simple. You’ll have to make much thinner reads and find smaller leaks in players’ styles that you can use to your advantage. A problem with making these adjustments is that you often don’t have enough information.

Seeing someone play a few dozen hands can give you some idea about their tendencies and inclinations in particular spots, but you shouldn’t overvalue that type of info.

With a small sample size, it could still just be a coincidence.

For example, you could see a player 3-bet several hands in a short span. Your initial thought might be that they’re probably doing it with a wide range of hands and that you might adjust to it by opening fewer hands or starting to 4-bet them as a bluff.

However, it’s entirely possible that they’re just running hot and have been dealt with some really good hands in a short time span.

While the exploitative style can definitely be more profitable, you need to make sure the information you’re basing your adjustments on is solid. Don’t be too quick to draw conclusions.

Be Mindful Of Other Players During Exploitative Poker

Another drawback of the poker exploitative play is that it opens doors for you to be exploited.

For example, you could adjust to a loose opponent who opens many hands preflop by 3-betting them light in position.

Against that particular player, your play is perfectly reasonable and will result in profit in the long run. However, you can face some problems if you’re not playing heads up. If there are some other competent players at the table, they might take notice of what you’re doing.

If a good player realizes you’re isolating a weak opponent too often, they might come after you. Since you’re 3-betting light, you won’t be able to do much when they start 4-betting you.

So, when making your adjustments, it’s not just the player you’re targeting that you need to consider. You also have to think about others involved in the game and what they might do.

If you notice one or two of them are starting to change their style to attack your adjustments, you’ll need to recalibrate your strategy.

You don’t have to deal with any of this when using GTO, which is why this approach is so powerful. You just know what you’re going to do and don’t care about what others are doing.

Always Mix Things Up

So, to wrap this discussion up, will you be better off playing GTO or an exploitative poker strategy?

The answer is… both!

Neither is better. Each serves a different purpose and depends on what kind of games you play.

In tough lineups, the GTO approach will usually work better as you’ll leave very little room for your opponents to take advantage of your plays.

In weaker games where your opponents aren’t paying as much attention and aren’t adjusting to your changes, you’ll make more money playing an exploitative poker strategy.

Since most of the time you’ll find yourself in situations with both weak and strong players at the table, you’ll be best off knowing both strategies.

That way, you can vary your style as needed and play exploitative strategy against weaker players to take full advantage of your mistakes and adopt the GTO approach against strong opponents to make sure they never get the upper hand.

]]>
How To Read Your Opponents When Playing Poker https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/reading-opponents-poker/ Thu, 08 Aug 2024 14:53:38 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=33989 Poker tells can give you a lot of valuable insights, but they shouldn’t be the only thing you consider when making decisions.

If you want to be good at reading your opponents when playing poker, you need to make use of all the information available. Everything from bet sizing, behavior, and even the time they take to make a decision, can be important in figuring out your opponent’s holdings.

Let’s take a look at the most effective ways to read your opponents in all types of poker, from live dealer poker to video poker.

The Most Important Part: Putting Your Opponents On A Range

No matter if you’re playing live or online poker, the most important part of reading your opponents is putting them on a range.

The ‘range’ is the various possible hands they could hold, so putting them on a range means trying to figure out what those hands could be. As the hand plays out and your opponent makes more decisions and takes more actions, you can use this information to narrow down their range.

It’s a vital skill to master.

But instead of thinking about ranges, many players try to guess the exact hand of their opponents on the river. This approach doesn’t work.

Good players don’t make blind guesses; they use a methodical approach. Even though it requires a lot of practice, you can learn to put your opponent on a range by following these four simple steps.

Step 1:  Analyze preflop actions

If you want to put your opponent on an accurate range of cards by the river, you should start your work preflop.

The first thing you need to consider is your opponent’s position.

They will be playing completely different hands from under the gun (UTG) and button (BTN), so it’s vital to assign them a realistic range.A player who is raising from the first position will not have 63s in their range, so is very unlikely to have strong holdings on the flop with 633.

However, a player on the BTN can easily have such hands, and way more other 3x holdings, so you need to play differently against these ranges.

Knowing the position is not enough. You also have to identify your opponent’s type.

If they’re passive, they could be playing just 15% of hands from the cutoff (CO), while an aggressive opponent could be opening 35% or even more. The same thought process should be applied for other situations when someone limps, or you face a 3-bet.

When you evaluate your opponent’s position and playing style, you can already make an educated guess of what hands they could be playing.

Step 2: Narrow down the range based on flop action

The next step is quite straightforward. Using information from the flop action, you can narrow down their range.

You can learn what your opponent should do in any given situation by studying game theory optimal (GTO) strategy and then adjust these ranges based on your observations.

This will help you understand what hands your opponent should be checking or betting and then reduce their likely holdings accordingly.

Step 3: Evaluate additional information

To narrow down the range even further, you should look at all the other information available to you. Things like your opponent’s poker stats, bet sizing, or even physical tells can say a lot about their holdings. The table dynamics will give you a ton of additional insights.

This is a huge part of learning how to play poker, so we’ll come back to it later on in the article.

Step 4: Keep reducing their possible holdings on the turn and river

Just like you did in the second step for the flop play, you can continue reducing your opponent’s possible holdings based on their actions and community cards on the turn and river.

It’s worth saying that lots of people have a similar playing style and share similarities that are easy to notice and exploit.

An example would be that they don’t adjust to the situation. If you notice someone checking top pair with a weak kicker on the flop, they’re very likely to take the same action with similar holdings in other hands as well.

So after seeing it once, you’ll be able to remove these holdings from their range in similar spots.

You can quickly get a feel of player tendencies and use this information until you notice that your particular opponent adjusts their play, and then react accordingly.

Learning to put your opponent on a range instead of guessing a specific hand is the best way to read other players.

However, you can make even better decisions if you take into consideration all the additional information available to you.

How To Read Opponents in Online Poker Games

Person playing online poker on their computer

Given that you don’t physically see your opponent when playing online, there are only a few things you can consider.

You should closely monitor bet sizing and how long your opponent takes to make decisions.

Let’s start with the first one.

1. Look at bet sizing

Although probably the best indication of your opponent’s strength, this information is massively underused in games.

Players are very unlikely to change bet sizing and their betting patterns, so if you notice how they play their strong and weak hands, and what sizing they use in different spots, it could be a serious tell.

Even though this is very player dependent, here are two common situations:

  • Using tiny bet sizing
    Players are unlikely to bet small as a bluff. Of course, they can do that with medium-strength hands, but you will rarely see complete air when facing such a bet. For the most part, they are simply trying to see a cheap showdown.
  • Over betting
    This is very player dependent but more often than not people try to choose over bets with strong holdings. This shouldn’t be applied against regulars who balance their ranges.

However, if you see someone using truly big sizing, especially on dry board, they are more likely to be value betting.

Most players understand that your range is polarized in these situations, where you either have a strong hand that is going to call no matter what or a weak one, which will be folding even to a smaller bet – so it makes no point to over bet as a bluff.

These are just guidelines but could be a good starting point when observing your opponents.

2. Observe how much time they spend making decisions

Many players leave a lot of valuable information on the table by not considering the timing of others.

Some actions can be a very good indication of your opponent’s hand strength:

  • Instant check
    Almost always an indication of a weak hand. It shows that your opponent didn’t have to spend any time to think through the decision, which is very unlikely to happen with a strong holding.
  • Instant bet
    Can indicate strength, except for a c-bet. When a player instantly decides to continuation bet, they’re less likely to have a strong holding, but in most other cases you should be aware of this information.
  • Instant call
    Most of the time it indicates that your opponent has a medium-strength hand or a draw, and they want to see another card without even thinking about raising or folding.
  • Checking after taking a lot of time
    Very unlikely to have a strong holding. From my experience, a bet in this situation will take down the most, the majority of the time.
  • Betting or raising after taking a lot of time
    This is very strong. I rarely see players bluffing with this line, and the reason they take more time is to appear weak, so you shouldn’t be fooled by this action.
  • Calling after taking a long time
    Generally indicates more strength. We can follow the same logic as in the previous point that players tend to take more time to look weaker and encourage another bet from you.

It goes without saying that this could change depending on the players, so you shouldn’t base your decision on this information alone but instead consider it along with other information.

Moreover, some players may try to fake these tells and act the opposite, so observe your opponent and be open to adjusting your strategy.

How To Read Opponents In Live Poker Games

While there are only a few ways to read your opponents when playing online, you can get a lot of additional information in live games.

That being said, there’s not much difference between online and live games regarding sizing and timing tells, so the same logic applies as covered in the online section.

However, there are a lot of other factors to consider that I’ll split into two different parts – physical and verbal tells.

Physical Tells

1. Physical tells that indicate strength

  • Player hesitates and then bets or raises
    A very reliable tell that indicates a lot of strength on your opponent’s part. They wouldn’t want to appear weak when bluffing and wouldn’t send such signals.
  • Double-checking hole cards before betting postflop
    In my experience, a player is very unlikely to be bluffing with this line of action. Also, players rarely have suited hands when double-checking, so that’s worth noticing.
  • Playing with chips in an unusual way
    Indicates that your opponent is relaxed and less likely to be bluffing. Of course, if they always play with chips in a specific way, ignore this, but if they usually sit quietly and out of nowhere start doing some tricks after betting, they’re probably not bluffing.
Person playing with poker chips

2. Physical tells that indicate weakness

  • The pretending-to-plan-to-bet-when-waiting act
    Whenever you see players reaching for chips when you’re thinking of betting, you can be sure that they do not have a strong hand. It doesn’t necessarily mean that they’re going to fold to your bet but they’re very unlikely to have better than a one pair hand, so you can continue betting and barrel them off in most cases.
  • Counting chips for betting and then checking
    Strong indication of a weak or medium-strength hand. By this action, your opponent tries to appear strong and discourage you from betting while most likely just hoping for a cheap showdown.
  • Unnecessary movement
    This attracts attention and indicates a weak hand. If you notice someone putting chips in the pot by slamming it hard, hear loud announcements of call or bet, see extra arms or shoulders movements, you could be facing a weak hand and an opponent who is just trying to look scary. This also includes shuffling cards or doing anything else that draws the attention you actually wouldn’t want when having a strong hand.

As a general rule of thumb, players are weak when they try to show strength and are strong when showing weakness.

Verbal Tells

1. Verbal tells that indicate strength

  • Talking while in hand
    Indicates that the player is relaxed and less likely to bluff. Of course, when someone asks how many chips you have and the player answers, it doesn’t count. But if the player starts talking while you’re thinking without any particular reason, they’re probably trying to convince you that they’re just friendly and you should play with them.
  • Announcing they don’t have a strong hand
    If you think about it, why would anyone ever say something like this when bluffing? In reality, this is quite a reliable tell that indicates your opponent’s range is very strong. The same goes for naming the exact hand. If a player says that they don’t have JT on 987 5 2, you can almost be guaranteed that they have at least a 6x or even T6 and are trying to make their range look weaker, so you’ll call.
    Pretty much any announcement of a weak hand ever actually means they have a weak hand or even a draw.
  • Asking for action
    Whenever you hear a player saying something like “you are committed,” “if you have it, you have it,” “let’s go,” or anything that encourages you to play, they’re likely holding something good.
Person talking in poker game

2. Verbal tells that indicate weakness

  • Joking when waiting for action
    Smiling and laughing is an indication of a weak hand from a player who is waiting to act (not necessarily true for player who is betting themself), but it’s even more likely to be true when a player is joking. Again, the reasoning is very similar. They would not risk attracting attention and discouraging action with a premium holding, so they’re more likely to be weak when joking or making funny statements.
  • Verbally announcing checking
    Indicates a weak hand because they want to appear confident to prevent you from betting. The louder the check is, the more likely the player has a weak holding. The same could be said about verbal announcements of “calling”. When they have poor holding, they’ll do everything to indicate strength, which is very unlikely action with a really strong hand, because they would not want to discourage the action.

Everything can be logically explained, so always try to remember this and make better decisions.

Important Takeaways

  • Generally, acting strong = weak hand, acting weak = strong hand.
  • Tells are more useful when playing against recreational players.
  • Some players try to give false tells, so be aware of this possibility.
  • Use everything as an additional source of information, don’t blindly follow one thing.
  • Bet sizing and timing tells can be used both live and online.
  • Putting an opponent on a range is by far the most reliable way to predict their possible holdings.
]]>
What is Big 2? How To Master the Rules of This Amazing Card Game https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/big-2-card-game/ Tue, 06 Aug 2024 13:48:16 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41253 In a Big 2 card game, your objective is to get rid of all of your cards before any other players. A standard game of Big 2 is played between 4 participants. Each round the player has a hand of 13 cards, and – as you may have guessed – the highest-ranking card value is the humble 2.

The Essentials

  • The aim of the Big 2 card game is to get rid of all your cards as fast as possible. Popular across Asia, this easy-to-learn card game uses common poker hands and is similar to other card-shedding games like President or Crazy Eights.
  • The game is called Big 2 because the 2 is the highest ranked card, taking the place of the Ace in most poker hands. The Chinese name (Choh Dai Di) translates directly as ‘Big Old Two‘.
  • Big 2 game turns start of the lead player laying a single card or a poker hand. The other players take turns ‘shedding’ higher ranking variations of that hand until no more cards can be shed. The player who played the highest hand then plays the first hand of the round.
  • The game ends when one player has no cards and scores a perfect zero. The other players lose points based on how many cards they have in their hands. The aim of the game is to keep your score as low as possible.

How to Play The Big 2 Card Game: The Basics

The Big 2 card game is a complex game that has multiple options and gameplay elements. You can learn how to play Big 2 by following the standard round gameplay below:

  • Shedding: Players can choose to “shed” cards. This is the main point of Big 2, as the goal is to shed all your cards before other players. You can shed cards based on hand rankings, but only one time per turn. This is why it is important that you know the hand rankings you can shed when you learn how to play Big 2 (see the next section in this guide).
  • Leading: The “Lead” is essentially the player who sheds first. All cards that are shed will go into a communal pile. When no more players can shed, the pile is removed, and a new pile starts. This time, the last player to shed will become the Lead.
  • Climbing: When shedding to the pile, players must improve the ranking of the previous shed. This is known as the “Climb”, as the next cards on the pile will always rank higher than the previous cards. For example, you could play a Pair (6? 6?) on a lower pair (4? 4?). Players cannot go over a leading combination. So, if the previous shed was a single, you can only “Climb” by adding a higher-ranking single.

Gameplay now continues with players shedding cards or passing when they cannot shed. This will happen until the first player sheds all their cards and wins the round. If the players continue in subsequent rounds, the remaining three players will have penalty points for the cards they have left in their hands.

When learning how to play Big 2, the first step is understanding the value of cards. The game jumbles traditional hand values you know when then you learn the poker rules.

After the 2, the next highest ranking cards are A, K, Q, J, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3. However, Big 2 also ranks suits, with Spades being the most valuable, followed by Hearts, Clubs, and Diamonds (?>?>?>?).

How to Set up a Big 2 Game

Each Big 2 card game starts with the deal. This is also the most complex part of the game, but luckily, a Big 2 online poker game will handle the deal automatically. In online live dealer games will be the house, and in casual games offline, the dealer is chosen at random. Cards are dealt counter-clockwise to all players.

Once all cards from a standard 52-card deck (13 to each player) have been dealt, the round will begin. Big 2 card game rules state that the player who first receives their cards will take the first turn and have the chance to shed cards. Some Big 2 card game variants may start the gameplay with the player with the lowest card ranking.

Card hand image for Big 2 Card Game article.

Image credit: Ramosh Artworks/Shutterstock

Big 2 Card Combinations: What is a Winning Hand?

Card combinations in Big 2 allow you to shed cards more quickly. Known as melds, the combinations can be put onto the pile if they are leading the previous shed. The highest value suit of any combination will dictate the overall suit.

Below are the most common combinations:

COMBINATIONEXAMPLERANK (LOW TO HIGH)
Singles3?Lowest
Doubles4? 4?Low
Triples6? 6? 6?Medium-Low
Snakes6? 7? 8? 9? 10?Medium
Flowers2? 3? Q? 6? K?Medium
GourdJ? J? J? 5? 5?Medium-High
Bomb7? 7? 7? 7?High
Straight Flush9? 10? J? Q? K?Highest
  • Singles: This is a single card according to its rank and suit.
  • Pairs/Doubles: A pair of cards of the same value. Doubles can be different suits, with the highest ranking suit covering the meld.
  • Three-Kinds/Triples: A combination of three cards with the same rank.
  • Straights/Snakes: Like the classic five-card poker hand made of card values in ascending order.
  • Flushes/Flowers: Five cards of the same suit but any rank.
  • Full House/Gourd: A five-card combination comprising a Pair and Triple.
  • Four-Kind/Bomb: Four cards of the same rank, with a fifth “kicker” card included as a single.
  • Straight Flush: As the best possible shedding meld, this is when five cards of the same suit are in ascending order of value.

Big 2 Scoring: Hand Ranking and How to Win

Importantly, in most situations, the Big 2 card game is played over multiple rounds in a points-based system. Whether the set score or time limit is met, the player with the best score will win the game. This is a losing points game, as there is no way to gain points, and 0 is a winning total.

If a player sheds all their cards, the remaining players are fined one penalty point for each remaining card they have.

There are also additional penalties. If you still have 10 to 12 cards in your hand, your penalty total will be doubled. 13 cards remaining means you could not shed one card throughout the round, and you will receive a tripled 39 penalty points.

Card hand image for Big 2 Card Game article.

Image credit: Ramosh Artworks/Shutterstock

The Big 2 Edge: Strategies to Outplay Your Opponents

Before you start playing Big 2, our experts have outlined a few of their top tips to help enhance your gameplay and potentially improve your chances of winning.

  • If you lead the pile, always discard/shed your highest-ranking combination first. It may be tempting to wait, but it is always best to shed your cards as soon as you can.
  • Leading the pile means you will control the combination for the whole game. If you play the highest possible first-shedding round, you could make it hard for other players to shed.
  • When you are not leading, try to gauge what your opponents have in their hands by looking closely at what cards they are shedding.

Advanced Big 2 Card Game Techniques

If you want to take your Big 2 gameplay to the next level, you may want to explore more advanced strategies. Because only one deck of cards is used, Big 2 is a game where it is reasonably possible to count cards. You’ll need a great memory, but you already know the cards you have, which means there are 41 other cards to track.

As gameplay progresses, you can see which cards your opponents are shedding. If you can track these cards, you will have a better idea of which cards are left. While knowing the cards left in play will not directly lead to you winning, it can help you make more informed decisions about when to shed or pass.

How to Gamble When Playing A Big 2 Card Game

As with any game that with a defined winner that plays in round, Big 2 can be gambled on. Gambling when playing Big 2 is common and very popular across Asia. Since the Chinese invented playing cards, its not surprising that they’ve got a long history of inventing amazing games and way to gamble on them.

Some of the different way in which you can gamble when playing Big 2 include:

  • Betting on who has the highest ranked poker hand in any round
  • Betting on the round winner
  • Betting on the overall winner
  • The losing player forfeiting money to the winning player based on how many cards they have left in their hand at the end of the game.

The Big 2 card game is available online but is admittedly not as common as other games. Even so, you can find online casino sites and other online platforms that allow you to play real money Big 2 from the comfort of your couch. This gives you the ability to play directly against another player in live dealer variants or virtually against a computer.

Big 2 Conquest: Triumphing with Skill and Strategy

Despite it seeming like a basic shedding game, the reason that Big 2 is so popular in Asia is because its simple to learn, but challenging to master. Once you have a good grasp of poker hands, you can employ advanced techniques like card counting to win.

However, while it makes for a perfect alterative to poker on gambling night, its just as fun as a relaxing card game with friends!

Title Image credit: Ramosh Artworks/Shutterstock

]]>
Dead Man’s Hand in Poker: What is it And How To Play it? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/dead-mans-hand-poker/ Thu, 01 Aug 2024 13:54:38 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=17882 The dead man’s hand is one of the most infamous poker hands of all time. It is also one that is evocative to superstitious players.

What is the Dead Man’s Hand in Poker?

  • The dead man’s hand is a poker hand containing two black aces and two black eights alongside a face down kicker card.
  • This most famous of poker hands entered popular culture because it was the cards in Wild Bill Hickock’s hand when he was shot.
  • Since Wild Bill’s untimely death, aces and eights has been considered an unlucky hand in poker.
  • While you’re unlikely to get shot if your dealt aces and eights in your next game, it is a marginal hand that take a little skill to play properly
  • This guide will take you through the history behind the dead man’s hand and how to play it when you get dealt it.

With plenty of legends and intrigue behind this poker hand, we are here to unlock all the secrets. Read on as we guide you through what the dead man’s hand is, its origins, composition, and whether this poker hand is worth playing.

The Legend of the Dead Man’s Hand and Wild Bill

While the exact meaning of the dead man’s hand has been debated, the origins are well documented. It comes from the legend of the notorious lawman James Butler “Wild Bill” Hickock, who was shot dead while he held a specific poker hand. A known gambler, the hand Hickock was holding when he met his end has become known as bad luck.

According to the story, Wild Bill was playing real money poker on a table alongside Jack “Crooked Nose” McCall and several other players. McCall lost his whole pot, mostly to Bill Hickock. Wild Bill took an honorable stance and told McCall he would buy him breakfast and that he should not play again until he could pay back the money.

McCall was angered by this and came back drunk to see Wild Bill still playing cards at. Hickok was known for sitting in the corner because he was paranoid someone would try to kill him.

However, on that day, another player would not give up their corner seat at the poker table, so Bill played with his back to the door. Given the popularity of online poker and video poker, this is less of a problem for the modern player.

As McCall approached, he drew his Colt .45 and shot Wild Bill in the head while shouting, “Damn you! Take that!” And so, one of the most iconic and lasting legends in the history of poker was set.

Why Are Aces And 8s in The Dead Man’s Hand?

As legends have a habit of doing, the details are murky. The exact hand Wild Bill was holding is unknown, and there is a lot of debate about the hand. Even so, when superstitious poker players hold the dead man’s hand, they see it as bad luck.

The fateful day happened on August 2, 1876, and it did not take long for the word of the dead man’s hand to spread through the Old West and beyond. The first mentions of the hand were on record in 1886, but then it was described as a full house of three jacks and two tens. These days, most players see the dead man’s hand as two black aces and two black eights.

Over the last 150 years, there have been other interpretations of what the dead man’s hand is. However, the modern understanding came from the 1920s in a biography of Bill Hickock, Wild Bill Hickok: The Prince of Pistoleers

Whether today’s definition of the hand is accurate or not, the two black aces and two black eights have become the best-known interpretation.  

image for the Dead Man's Hand Article

Image credit: Armi1961 Photo/Shutterstock

The Dead Man’s Hand: How to Factor it into Your Poker Strategy

There may be a time during your online poker gameplay when you get the dead man’s hand. If you are an incredibly superstitious player, you may just fold the hand and move on. But that’s probably not the best poker strategy.

There is nothing wrong at all with playing this famous hand the next time you’re at a casino. The real question is whether the dead man’s hand is good or not.

Well, it is a middle-ground hand that is neither terrible nor excellent. Two pairs of higher-ranking cards is a decent hand, especially if you get the hand on the flop and can chase a full house or three of a kind. However, if you play through the round, two pairs is not a high-value hand.

Playing with the dead man’s hand can be interesting because you can potentially catch an opponent who’s trying to bluff with a low hand. With the dead man’s hand, a player will compete well with players holding a pair, such as 10-10, 9-9, 7-7, or 6-6

Common Mistakes to Avoid With the Dead Man’s Hand

During a game of Texas Hold’em, Ace-Eight is what we consider a marginal hand. How you choose to play will depend on which type of player you are:

  • In a late position, it is likely that you will call, but there is potential to raise if you fancy a risk. However, some players will simply fold this hand away from the start, and not for superstitious reasons.
  • For example, if the player leading raises, it is probably best to fold the A-8. As mentioned, if the hand does not hit with an A-8 to form the dead man’s hand after the flop, you will be left on a high ace.
  • Of course, you may get an ace in the flop for a pair, but while that is a high pair, the low 8 puts a lot of risk on playing on, especially during a hand where other players are raising.

It’s not a Texas Hold ‘Em Poker Hand

It is worth noting that Wild Bill was reportedly playing 5-card stud when he was shot, which is a variation Omaha poker, with a greater number of hole cards. This version of poker would be more rewarding to the dead man’s hand. You would have all five cards in your hand, so the Aces and Eights pairs would already be there. This would be a good hand in 5-card stud, so Hickok may have been holding winning cards in his hand.

It may seem like we class the dead man’s hand as a poor combination, but that is not the case. In fact, the average winning hand in Hold’em is two pairs. Bearing that in mind, Aces and Eights is a solid hand to have in either live or online poker. Even so, it comes with risk because it does not take much for an opponent to have a higher ranking.

The Dead Man’s Hand for Beginners

For poker beginners, this makes the dead man’s hand a bit of a dangerous hand. On the one hand, it looks like an excellent combination, with two pairs and one pair being Aces.

Experienced players with a good poker strategy know how to weigh the risk with potential reward, understanding the possible dangers of this hand. However, beginners may just see what they think is a very good hand and bet high on it.

Remember that while a solid hand, the dead man’s hand is not spectacular.

What is The Significance of The Dead Mans Hand?

One of the most famous hands in poker, the dead man’s hand conjures plenty of superstition and interest. It also plays an important role in poker history. Don’t throw this hand away because of legend; the dead man’s hand can still potentially win you pots.

Wild Bill may not have had much luck meeting his end while holding this hand, but hopefully, the dead man’s hand can help you walk away with the pot.

Title Image credit: Semmic Photo/Shutterstock

]]>
What is ICM in Poker? How to Use ICM in Your Poker Strategy https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/icm-in-poker/ Wed, 31 Jul 2024 10:17:34 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41199 What Is ICM: How to Use it in Your Poker Games
  • ICM, or Independent Chip Model, is a mathematical model used in poker to calculate a player’s overall equity in a tournament.
  • The model is essential in tournament play, especially during final table and bubble play, where it helps calculate the real monetary value of a player’s chip stack.
  • ICM considers factors such as the total chips in play, the payout structure, and the player’s current chip stack to calculate the expected payout or equity.
  • Understanding and utilizing the ICM can greatly influence strategies, particularly when deciding whether to risk one’s tournament life.
  • While ICM is a valuable tool in decision-making, it also has limitations and doesn’t account for variables such as player skill levels and blinds. Use it as part of a broader strategic framework.

If you play poker tournaments, either online or at your local casino, it’s crucial to understand poker ICM, or the Independent Chip Model. While it might sound like technical jargon, knowing ICM poker strategies – and what does ICM mean for your poker strategy – is incredibly valuable.

Let me explain.

How is The Independent Chip Model Used in Poker Tournaments?

The first thing you need to know about ICM poker is that it only applies to tournaments and online poker tournaments. Not cash games.

When you’re playing poker, you want to ask yourself what is the best decision mathematically. Am I getting a good price to complete my flush draw? Straight draw? Gutshot? Do I think I likely have the best poker hand? When you’re playing a poker tournament, however, you want to ask yourself two questions:

  • What is the best mathematical decision I can make?
  • How will this decision impact my position in the tournament?

It’s the second question that changes everything – and gets to the heart of ICM poker model.

For example, let’s say you’re getting excellent pot odds to draw for a flush. The math tells you to call, even if it’s for your entire stack. In a cash game, you should always take this opportunity because you can profitably win money; if you miss your flush draw, you can easily rebuy.

Now let’s say you’re a big stack in a poker tournament or online poker tournament and there are only five people left. According to the ICM model in poker, you would not want to take this opportunity because it would jeopardize your position.

The chips you would lose are worth more than the chips you would gain. Said another way, the benefit of going from second or third in chips to first in chips is not worth the risk of elimination.

What is ICM in Poker?

ICM means adjusting your decision-making to your ranking in the tournament rather than the value of your hand.

Here’s another crazy example.

  • Imagine there are three people left in an online casino poker tournament.
  • You’re tied for the chip-lead. The person in third place is very short-stacked.
  • Your fellow big stack goes all-in — and you look down at a shiny pair of pocket jacks.

What do you do here?

  • In a normal three-player cash game, you would almost always call. It’s highly unlikely your opponent has a better hand than you, especially with so few players.
  • But in a poker tournament where you need to factor in poker ICM, you should fold.

Why? Because even if you have a better hand than your opponent, it’s not worth the risk. Perhaps they have Ace-Ten, where you’re a nearly 70% favorite. Or a pair of threes, where your equity is closer to 80 percent. Doesn’t matter. The 20-30% of the time that they will outdraw you poses too great a threat to your chip stack.

Woman playing poker for the ICM in poker article.

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

A Real Life Example of Extreme ICM

I once put someone to the ultimate poker ICM test. I was at the final two tables of a $350 tournament, fewer than 20 people remained. First prize was over $30,000. I was second place in chips.

Only one person had more chips than me — had me ‘covered’ — and he raised preflop. I called with a pair of nines. The player in the big blind was a short-stack and went-all in. The then chip-leader called.

I decided to go all-in to isolate the short-stack, figuring my pair of nines could likely beat one player but would struggle against two.

The chip leader was outraged, visibly distressed, and asked for an exact count of my stack. We were incredibly close. After someone called ‘time’ on him, he finally called… with pocket aces.

Why the hesitation? With a pair of aces?! Because of ICM. Even though he was an 80% favorite against almost any hand I had, it was still an enormous risk. Eighty percent of the time, he would win the pot and increase his chip lead. But 20% of the time, he would finish with just over a min-cash and a meager profit margin.

Mathematically, he should always call. But ICM poker made him think twice.

Strategies For Utilizing Poker ICM

Short stack IMC poker strategy

Since you don’t have much to lose, you can play more freely and aggressively. When you’re low on chips, ICM poker doesn’t really apply since there is no ‘expected payout value’ to deserve.

Medium stack IMC poker strategy

you need to keep an eye on stack sizes at all times. If you’re at a final table and in the middle of the pack, it would be a disaster to get eliminated before a short stack. You have to play much tighter in hopes that a smaller stack will bust — earning you a higher payout.

Big stack IMC poker strategy

big stacks can apply great pressure on middle stacks according to ICM poker. The middle stacks still have a lot to lose so you can ‘bully’ them by presenting tough decisions. A middle stack might fold a strong poker hand, such as as pocket queens if a micro short stack is about to bust.

So as a big stack, you can shove wide. Just be cautious when it comes to tangling with other big stacks — you want to tread those waters carefully and generally avoid.

What is the Major Drawback of ICM Poker Analysis?

As you can see from my real life example, an ICM poker analysis made what would usually be a slam-dunk easy decision a close call. It changes the math.

In detailed ICM analysis, a computer calculates your decision — factoring in payout considerations. Advanced programs can, in fact, adjust your decision based on your current ranking. Truly adhering to ICM means following the math adjusted for your tournament standing, but in everyday play, it involves prioritizing the potential for larger pay jumps over the immediate strength of your hand.

The ICM poker model generally encourages more conservative play, focusing on avoiding short-term swings to achieve bigger payouts.

However, the granular Independent Chip Model approach is unrealistic for most players. Humans can’t process these decisions quickly (it’s hard enough to learn basic poker probabilities). Calculating whether you should call an all-in with Ace-King based on your tournament position is nearly impossible for most people. In practice, you might fold Ace-King due to ‘ICM pressure,’ aiming to avoid variance and maintain your chip lead.

ICM Poker Doesn’t Take Into Account the Human Factor

Another drawback of strict ICM analysis is that it doesn’t account for the human factor. Some players are tighter and bluff less than a computer might assume. (Computers tend to overestimate bluff frequencies.)

Your decision to call or fold will also depend on your ‘reads’ and ability to spot tells. Someone born before 1945 might jam a smaller percentage of hands than a younger player, but computers don’t incorporate a senior citizen discount.

Customizing ranges in computer applications called ‘solvers’ can help, but emulating this on the fly is extremely impractical and overall unnecessary.

As long as you weigh your standing in the tournament against your actual hand, you are already taking Independent Chip Model poker into consideration.

ICM Poker Demystified: Elevating Your Game With Strategic Insights

Understanding what is ICM in poker tournaments can increase your chances of winning by reducing risks. It involves adjusting your decisions based on your poker tournament position rather than just the value of your hand.

While mastering ICM Poker can lead to better choices — you can even study and memorize computer outputs — it’s also important to balance the math with the practical realities of live play and human decision-making.

Title image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
What Are Slot Tournaments and How Do You Win Big at One? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-are-slot-tournaments/ Tue, 30 Jul 2024 13:07:56 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41187 Slot tournaments is a casino competition between players, either in a real-world casino, or online, where a group of players compete against each other playing casino slot machines in order to win the designated prize, or rewards.

There are different kinds of slot tournaments, some with many players playing against each other, down to where only a few players play. Entry is by means of a fee, called the buy-in, and this may be for cash, or tokens, or offered for free by the casino to their premium players, or to attract new players to their games.

How Do Competitive Slot Tournaments Work?

In a real-world casino, a section of the casino slot floor is roped off and designated as the tournament area. This area contains special slot machines, called tournament slots, which can be either specifically-designed slot machines for tournaments only, or standard casino slots, but these have been equipped with a new program for play, which is called tournament mode.

What Is Tournament Mode?

In any casino, real-world or online, each type and kind of slot machine has a computer program inside its brain which tells the machine how to play the game which is selected by the player, or which is housed in that slot machine cabinet.

If one of these regular slot machines is selected to become part of slot tournament play, it’s internal program is changed from its regular play programming into what is called tournament mode. This is a special configuration which plays and pays differently to the way that the machine would normally play and pay.

Usually this means that while in tournament mode, the game will pay much more often and with much bigger pays. ?

Special Designated Tournament Slots

There are also specially-designated and built slot machines specifically for slot tournaments. for example, the slot machine manufacturer EVERI have a system called tourn-event, which is a designated bank of slots which are specifically configured to play only slot tournaments. ?

How Does A Slot Tournament Machine Work?

The principles are the same as all traditionally-available slot machines. Since most of these machines now use play buttons to initiate play – instead of the more traditional handle pulls – these tournament machines also work that way.

Players play them the same way, ?by pressing the play button as fast as they can to accumulate as many credits and wins as possible in the allocated time.

Slot machines for what is a slot tournament article.

How To Get Into A Slot Tournament?

There are a number of different ways in which you can play in a slot tournament. The most common is to buy an entry, which is called the buy-in. The amount of this varies considerably from tournament to tournament, and from casino to casino. This can also be different with online slots, where the number of participating players is not limited by the space required to house the machines, as is the case in a real-world casino.

In most casinos, the standard buy-in for a slot tournament is usually about $25. But this can be as much as $1,000 per entry, and even more. I have played in such tournaments in the past where the entry was at least $1,000, and in some cases up to $10,000 per entry. But in general, the most that today’s casinos will charge for an entry will be about $100.

Free Entry For Slot Tournaments

On some occasions, players can often also enter a slot tournament for free! That’s because many casinos use slot tournaments either as a reward for their regular and premium players, but also to attract new players to their casino.

So, if you are already a regular player, you may get an invitation to a slot tournament with free entries for yourself and your spouse, or significant other. Or if you are new to the casino, you may get an offer in the mail, or text, or email, offering you a free entry, or perhaps a 2-for-1, and so on.

And finally, you can often also use your player reward points to enter the slot tournament. If you are a regular player at this casino, and use your player’s club card for your play, you will be accumulating bonus points which can then be used for a variety of extra benefits and bonuses. and entries into slot tournaments are often part of these rewards, which you will be able to access through the player’s club in your favorite casino.

How To Win A Slot Tournament?

Slot tournaments have different pay structures, depending on which kind of tournament this is If it’s what’s called a free-roll tournament, this means that entry into it is for free, and therefore the prizes which will be won may not be in cash, but perhaps in other types of gifts. the most common of this is to win free play credits, which are then added to your player’s club card account.

You can then use these as cash for your favorite regular casino slot machines. This you can do by inserting your player’s club card into the machine’s card reader, enter your pin, and then select free play credits from the menu, and then choose how many to add to that machine’s credit meter.

You can’t cash out these free play credits, but whatever you win by using them is yours, and this means that you can cash out these wins in real money.

Cash Reward Slot Tournaments

Most casino slot tournaments – as well as those online which require a cash buy-in – will have a tournament winners structure posted, and this will show how much each player will win if they reach those levels.

For most slot tournaments this will be usually be the top three players – and these will be those players who have accumulated the highest total of accumulated tournament credits throughout all of the rounds of the tournament.

These prizes are almost always in cash, and the amount of that cash will depend on whether of not this is a slot tournament which pays a percentage of the total entries for each prize, or if this is a slot tournament with a fixed prize structure.

Fixed Prize Structure for Slot Tournaments

A fixed prize structure means that the listed awards for the winners will have a specifically-designated amount. For example, most such slot tournaments will have, say, $1,000 as first prize, with $500 as the second prize, and $250 as the third place prize. These are the most common fixed prize structure pay scales which you will find in standard casino slot tournaments.

In many cases these types of tournaments will also offer consolation prizes as several runner-up prizes, and these can be either buffet coupons, or show coupons, or gifts, or perhaps a coffee mug, or some other type of thank you award for those who bought into the tournament, but did not win the major cash prizes.

Percentage Participation Prize Structure for Slot Tournaments

A percentage prize participation structure means that in this type of slot tournament the amount of the winning prizes will depend on how many players entered with their buy-in. This, therefore, means that the actual cash amount of the prizes will depend on the number of players who entered the tournament, and not on a fixed prize amount.

The value of the final cash awards in these percentage participation tournaments is decided by the percentage value of each award.

The advantage of these types of slot tournaments is that the more players who buy-in, the bigger the prizes will be, and, therefore, the more places will also be paid. in these tournaments the total amount of the buy-ins is called the prize pool, and it is from this that the stated percentages will be paid to the winners.

Image credit: eskystudio/Shutterstock

What are the Different Types of Slot Tournaments?

We have already mentioned some of the types of slot tournaments which are popular with casino players, both in real-world casinos, as well as in online casinos. So here let’s briefly explore all of the most popular forms of such tournaments.

Multi-Player Slot Tournaments

These are the most popular tournaments, and it simply means that there are many players playing, all competing against each other. Most slot tournaments will be of this type.

Single-Player Slot Tournaments

This is a specialized type of slot tournament where there is only one player playing, and competing against a specified goal or objective.

For example, a single-player slot tournament machine may be available in the casino, and for the amount of the entry fee (whatever that may be) you can sit at that game and play only by yourself, and after the designated period of play the machine will then tell you if you won any of the qualifying prizes.

Buy-In Slot Tournaments

This is the type of tournament where you pay a cash fee to enter, and then play throughout the rounds of the tournament, and if you reach the qualifying advancement in each such successive round, you will progress to the finals, and there you may reach the top tier of the winners, and collect your prize.

Free-Roll Slot Tournaments

This is a tournament where the entry is free, and therefore you don’t need to buy-in for cash, or some other buy-in requirement. These free-roll slot tournaments are usually offered by the casino as a reward to their regular and premium players, but they can also be used to attract new players to that casino, or online casino.

Sit-n-Go Slot Tournaments

Sit-n-Go (SnG) are usually short tournaments with a number of specifically-designated player spots, usually around 10-to-12 players at a time. This tournament is usually a cash buy-in type of tournament, and it begins automatically when all the designated player spots have been bought.

A SnG tournament ends when the designated amount of play time has been completed, which is usually about 10 minutes of really fast play. When the time expires, the machines will shut down automatically, and the tournament staff will verify who has the highest scores, and those players are then awarded the top prizes.

One-Shot Slot Tournaments

In the majority of slot tournaments, there are usually several rounds before a winner is decided. In one-shot slot tournaments you only get one chance at placing in the winning tier.

Feeder Slot Tournaments

A Feeder Slot Tournament has the same structure as all the other similar tournaments, except here the idea is to score enough points to advance into a bigger tournament, with much larger prizes.

For example, let’s say that a Feeder Slot Tournament is offered with only a $25 Buy-In. But this tournament does not offer a cash prize. Instead, the Top Prize is an Entry into a $1,000 Slot Tournament, where the Prize Pool is much bigger, and therefore offers a chance to walk away with a lot more money.

Scheduled Slot Tournaments

These are the most popular slot tournaments, because the casino, or online casino, can schedule them in advance, usually several weeks, or perhaps by even a few months. This often results in larger turnouts with more players, and, therefore, more money for the prize pool and the prizes.

These tournaments are also popular with casual players, because they can then schedule their casino trip, or vacation, in advance, to coincide with these scheduled tournaments. These slot tournaments are especially popular in casino destinations like Las Vegas, where the major casinos can attract and invite a great many players from all over the country.

Survival Slot Tournaments

These are among the type of slot tournament where players compete in rounds, each round usually about 10 minutes, with the top players from each round advancing into the next round, and so on. How many players advance into the next round depends on the specific rules for that tournament, and for that casino, either real-world or online.

These rules can be substantially different, so it is in your interest to check just exactly what is required to advance into the next round, and how many players will so advance. In most such Slot Tournaments, the top three player will advance, but this can be the top 5 players, or even more, depending on how many players compete in each round.

slot machines for what is a slot tournament article.

Image credit: eskystudio/Shutterstock

What is the Best Strategy to Win Slot Tournaments?

All Slot Machines are random, and all winning spins are based solely on luck.

However, slot tournaments are not without skill and speed and dexterity are among the most important skills!

This means that you must hit the play button as fast as possible, and in a rhythmic pattern to coincide with the activation of the reels, and re-activation of the next spin at the most optimum point.

When the slot machine hits a win, it will temporarily disable the play button, while the winning amount runs up on the credit meter. During this time pressing the button makes no difference, because the player cannot re-activate the next spin while the machine is busy running up the credits from the current win.

Keeping the rhythm of the game and not distracted by the spinning wheels or symbols on the display screen any of the bells and whistles that will happen as you play is the most critical skill to learn when it comes to slot tournaments.

There are however a few other skills that can help get you in the winner’s circle:

Skills Needed to Win Slot Tournaments

  • Always play all the available pay lines
  • Always play maximum credits – whatever this may be
  • Learn to play fast – you can practice on regular slots in the casino
  • Lear to push the play button rhythmically and as fast as you can press it
  • Keep your mind clear and do not be distracted
  • Focus on speed – this is most important, next to playing fast on the play button
  • Learn what will get you into the next round – is it the most points, or how fast you can play through the tournament credits

Title image credit: eskystudio/Shutterstock

]]>
What is Omaha Poker? A Fast Beginner’s Guide https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/omaha-how-to-play/ Mon, 29 Jul 2024 14:50:14 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41108 In Omaha poker, each player is dealt four hole cards, twice as many as in Texas Hold’em. This means each player can make more potential hands, resulting in a bigger action, bigger chips stacks game — even when adjusted for stakes.

Omaha Poker Game: What You Need to Know

  • The main difference between Texas Hold’em and the Omaha card game is that each player is dealt four hole cards, instead of two.
  • The larger number of hole cards leads to a greater number of possible hands per player, which increases the pace and volatility of the game.
  • If Texas Hold’em is the chess of poker, the Omaha poker game is more like boxing. Omaha Hold’em is fast, punchy, and has greater highs and lows than the more considered pace of Texas Hold’em.
  • The Omaha card game is popular amount casual players, because of the faster pace, but it can also be a welcome break from the occasional boredom of a high intensity Texas Hold’em tournament.

Texas Hold’em walked so the Omaha game could run. These days, whenever you go to play poker at a casino or online casino, especially in Europe, you’ll likely see ‘Omaha poker’ tables running and it’s hugely popular with online poker players.

But what are the rules of Omaha poker? This article will teach you everything from how to play Omaha poker game to the essential strategy tips you need to know in order to master the Omaha card game.

How Does Omaha Poker Differ from Texas Hold’em: An Overview

While Omaha poker is fairly similar to its Texas cousin, there are a number of important differences, including:

Difference #1: Higher Variance and Larger Bankroll Requirements

If you’ve ever watched professional poker players play video poker on TV, you’ve probably noticed something: it’s slow. Very slow.

There’s more in common with watching a chess match than there is a high-intensity sports match or even a slot machine pull. It’s a long, drawn-out, thoughtful and methodical game. Even to the players, there can be long spells of boredom.

Omaha poker differs from Texas Hold’em in that it’s considered to be ‘higher action’ — in other words, more intense. The Omaha card game is not for the faint of heart. It’s a game that thrives on volatility and big swings, creating an experience that is thrilling for some and nerve-wracking for others.

Increased Volatility Comes with Two Major Impacts:

  1. Recreational Gamblers Love to Play Omaha Poker: The fast-paced nature and frequent big hands make Omaha more exciting and appealing to casual players.
  2. Professional Poker Players Have a Decreased Mathematical Edge: The added complexity and increased variance mean that even the best poker players can experience larger swings in their bankrolls.

Because the Omaha card game is such a swingy game, you need an even larger bankroll to play an Omaha game than you do for Texas Hold’em. The higher variance means you have to be prepared for big upswings and downswings. A financial buffer is necessary.

Reason #2: More Hole Cards and Hand Combinations

In Texas Hold’em, each player is dealt two hole cards, leading to a relatively straightforward calculation of potential hands and probabilities.

How Omaha Hold’em differs from Texas Hold’em is that each player is given four hole cards — dramatically increasing the number of possible hand combinations. This change has a profound effect on gameplay:

  • More Possibilities: With four hole cards, players have many more ways to make strong hands. This means that the winning hand at showdown is often much stronger in the Omaha card game than in Texas Hold’em. Hands that would be considered monsters in Hold’em, like two pair, are frequently second-best or worse in Omaha Poker.
  • Greater Complexity: The increased number of hole cards adds layers of complexity to the decision-making process. Players must consider not only the best possible hand they can make but also the best hand their opponents might have. Not only are you more likely to make a strong hand, your opponents are too.

Mentally, you need to adjust what you consider to be a ‘good hand’ in Omaha Poker versus Texas Hold’em. Sets and straights can become weak hands. Have a flush? It better be a ace-high flush or the nut flush — you are much more likely to get flush over flushed when playing in an Omaha poker game

Reason #3: Bluffing in an Omaha Poker Game

Bluffing is an essential part of any poker game, but it takes on a new dimension in Omaha card game compared to Texas Hold’em. This is one area how Omaha poker differs from Texas Hold’em wildly.

  • Frequency of Bluffing: In Texas Hold’em, bluffing is a common and often necessary strategy. The simplicity of having only two hole cards makes it easier to represent a wide range of hands. Remember, in a Texas Hold’em online poker game, it’s less likely that any player has a hand they feel particularly attached to or excited about. You can ‘scare’ people off a hand — making bluffing in Texas Hold’em more frequent than in Omaha.
  • More Players Seeing the Flop: In traditional Texas Hold’em poker tournament, you are likely only going to be facing off against one or two opponents. Large multiway pots are rare, especially at high stakes. But in Omaha poker, since four hole cards can make starting hands stronger, more people tend to see flops.
  • Inability to Go ‘All-in’: Bluffs are more effective when you can bet a large amount of chips or money, applying significant pressure. Most Omaha games are ‘PLO’ — Pot-Limit Omaha. Your maximum bet is capped at the size of the pot, limiting your ability to go all-in as frequently or bet an amount large enough to shake your opponent off their hand. This restriction means that you can’t apply as much pressure with a single bet as you can in No-Limit Texas Hold’em, making bluffs less intimidating.

Bluffing against multiple players is risky in both games, but it’s much trickier to bluff several opponents than it is to bluff one. With more players seeing the flop in Pot Limit Omaha, there’s a higher chance that someone has a strong poker hand or a strong draw.

Coupled with the fact that you can’t bet as much on the earlier streets (betting rounds), bluffing in Omaha is definitely rarer and more challenging.

Royal flush poker hand with chips

Image credit: RomanR/Shutterstock

How is Omaha Poker Different from Texas Hold’em: The Rules

While the Omaha card game and Texas Hold’em share many similarities, including the use of community cards, poker table positions, and the overall structure of betting rounds, they have several critical differences:

1. Hole Cards: In Texas Hold’em, players receive two hole cards. In Omaha, players receive four hole cards.

2. Hand Composition: In Texas Hold’em, players can use any combination of their hole cards and the community cards to form the best poker hand. In Omaha, players must use exactly two of their hole cards and exactly three of the five community cards.

3. Pot-Limit Omaha vs. No-Limit: While both games have multiple variants, Omaha is often played in Pot-Limit form (Pot-Limit Omaha, or PLO), whereas Texas Hold’em is commonly played in both No-Limit and Limit formats. ‘Pot-Limit’ simply means you cannot bet larger than the pot size at any given time. So if there is $80 in the pot, your max bet is capped at $80 in that particular instance.

As you can see, the rules for how to play Omaha poker are not exactly the same. Even though you are given four hole cards, you can only use two in your final hand combination.

Here are some examples:

  • You’re holding three clubs in your hand, and the board contains two clubs. That does not mean you have a flush.
  • Your hand contains a queen, a jack, and a ten, and the board contains an ace and a king. That does not mean you have a straight.

As a matter of fact, you must use two of your hole cards. Only two cards can ‘play.’

  • There are four spades on the board, and you hold the ace of spades. Do you have the ace-high flush? No – not unless you incorporate another hole card with a spade.

According to the Omaha poker rules, there is no such thing as a ‘four-card flush’ or a ‘one-liner straight’ like there is in Texas Hold’em. This often trips up beginners to poker when they first learn how to play Omaha poker. That aside, the hand rankings remain the same.

Here they are below if you need a quick poker cheat sheet or refresher.

poker hands cheat sheet for how to play Omaha poker

Omaha Poker Hand Rankings

Omaha poker hand rankings are identical to those in Texas Hold’em. From highest to lowest, they are:

1. Royal Flush: A, K, Q, J, 10, all of the same suit.

2. Straight Flush: Five consecutive cards of the same suit.

3. Four of a Kind: Four cards of the same rank.

4. Full House: Three of a kind combined with a pair.

5. Flush: Five cards of the same suit, not in sequence.

6. Straight: Five consecutive cards of different suits.

7. Three of a Kind: Three cards of the same rank.

8. Two Pair: Two pairs of cards of the same rank.

9. One Pair: Two cards of the same rank.

10. High Card: The highest card if no other hand is made.

Basic Omaha Poker Game Strategies

Now that you have a general grasp of how to play an Omaha game and how it differs from Texas Hold’em, let’s finish off by going over essential Omaha game poker strategies. These are key tips to keep in mind.

Nuts or Nothing

The importance of starting hand selection in Omaha poker cannot be overstated. Unlike Texas Hold’em, where you might play a wider range of hands, in an Omaha game, you want to focus on hands that have the potential to make the nuts (the best possible hand).

Look for hands with the ability to make ace-high and king-high flushes — otherwise you are likely to get coolered. Low cards go significantly down in value. Since two pairs are almost worthless too, it doesn’t make sense to play hands hoping to make a low straight, flush, or bottom two pair.

For example, the best starting hand in Omaha is A? A? K? K?. Why is this? You can make the ace-high flush in two different suits (you are ‘double-suited’), you can make the nut straight on a Q-J-T board, and your sets and full houses will be higher than other players’ sets and full houses.

Most money in an Omaha card game comes from people overvaluing their hands. You can easily beat your opponents if they evaluate hand strength in an Omaha card game the same way they do in Texas Hold’em.

Even though the hand rankings are the same, the relative hand strength is not.

The fastest way for a poker beginner to start winning in poker is by aiming to only play the nuts. Be as conservative as possible. A full house is even risky in Omaha poker if it’s a low full house — and the best way to avoid getting stuck with ‘bottom boat’ is by not playing small cards in the first place.

best omaha starting hands

Pot Control

Be cautious about building large pots unless you have a strong hand. Omaha poker is a game where the nuts changes frequently. You don’t want to invest a lot of chips in a pot unless you are confident you have the best hand or a very strong draw.

Drawing Hands

In an Omaha game, drawing hands are incredibly powerful. Hands that have the potential to improve to the nuts should be played aggressively. With more hole cards in play, draws are more likely to complete as there are often more ways to connect.

An Omaha card game is a more dynamic game than Texas Hold’em, meaning the best hand on the flop is unlikely to be the best hand on the river. This is why you should focus on playing draws to the nuts, rather than get attached to flopped pairs, two pairs, or sets.

As you transition from Texas Hold’em to Omaha Hold’em, remember that mathematical advantages are narrower. In Texas Hold’em, you might often find scenarios where your hand is an 80% favorite against your opponent.

In Omaha poker, it’s rare to have such a significant edge — you might be lucky to have a 55% advantage. The four hole cards reduce the extremes of advantage or disadvantage each player can have. That’s why focusing on nutted draws is crucial — these hands are much less prone to vulnerability.

All-In On Omaha Poker: Final Thoughts On Mastering The Game

Switching from Texas Hold’em to Omaha poker opens up a faster, more intricate game with bigger swings and unique challenges.

The Omaha poker game’s key differences — like higher variance, slimmer mathematical margins, and capped bet sizes — add depth to the game. Stay flexible because the best hand can easily change from flop to turn to river in Omaha.

Bluff rarely and carefully — if you don’t have the nuts, do it in a situation where you know that your opponent doesn’t either (ex. you hold the nut flush ‘blocker,’ such as the ace of hearts, making it impossible for them to have the best possible flush of that suit).

Whatever you do, keep in mind that Omaha poker is a popular twist for a reason — its merciless volatility is a great exercise for pros and recreational players alike.

Now that you’ve learned how to play Omaha poker, brush up on your betting and bluffing skills with easy-to-learn tips and tricks from the experts:

Title image credit: Vitalii Borkovskyi/Shutterstock

]]>
Durak Decoded: Unlocking the Secrets of Russia’s Favorite Card Game https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/discover-durak-rules/ Fri, 26 Jul 2024 12:33:21 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=10866 Durak is a popular card game in Russia and has enjoyed a golden period ever since the dissolution of the old Soviet Union because its simple rules make it a great pick up game

The Essentials

  • Hugely popular in Russia, Durak is a card shedding game similar to Shithead, Crazy Eights, Old Maid and Big 2. The player who discards all their cards first wins.
  • The Durak rules are simple to pick up and the game falls into the ‘easy to learn, hard to master’ category.
  • Best played with between two and five players, the Durak card game only requires a standard card deck, making it an excellent travelling game.
  • Because of its popularity, Durak is often gambled on in Russia, with the winning player (the first to discard all their cards) winning the pot.

Considering how many people play the game it’s not too well known outside of its native country. Here’s a look at how the Durak Rules, a step by step breakdown of a game turn, where you can play online, and how to gamble on a game of Durak.

image for article on Durak rules

Image credit: Vector Point Studio/Shutterstock

Crafting Strategy: How The Durak Rules Work

The concept of the game is very basic. Players must aim to be the quickest to get rid of all their cards. The last person with cards left is the ‘durak’ or fool.

A deck of 36 cards is used and the game is ideally played between two and five players. The deck is shuffled and each player receives six cards. The bottom card of the remaining deck in the middle of the table is displayed face up. This will indicate the trump suit.

The remaining cards in the deck are then placed on top of that face up card at a 90 degree angle so the face up card remains visible. This pile of cards will act as the draw pile called the ‘prikup’.

Cards discarded during the process of the game are placed on a discard pile away from the prikup and become inactive.

Playing by the Rules: A Step-By-Step Guide to Durak Gameplay

Now that you understand the basics of how Durak works, let’s take a look at a step-by-step guide to a Durak card game round:

  1. The set-up of durak means players must be forced to attack and defend. The player with the lowest trump card is the first designated attacker. The individual to their left is then the defender.
  2. The play rotates clockwise so that is always the case for the remainder of the game.
  3. Play begins with the attacker playing their first card face up. The defender then has the chance to either defend or pass the attack.
  4. If they successfully defend then they will not have to take on the attacker’s card. If they pass on the attack then they will take the attacker’s card, add it to their own card, and become the attacker themselves.
  5. Passing an attack cannot be done if the player does not possess a card of the same rank as the attacker.
  6. It is also possible for the defender to defeat the attacker.
  7. They can choose higher value cards from their pack to win the hand. Other players can add attacking cards at any point during the turn. If the defender decides they cannot survive the attack then at any point they can cut their losses and pick up the cards in play on the table before the situation worsens.
  8. If the player successfully defends against all attacking cards, then the cards are taken out of the game and placed on the discard pile.
  9. At the end of every hand, players must then draw cards from the remaining prikup until they are in possession of six cards each.
  10. This continues until the prikup is used up. Players may leave the game as soon as they have gotten rid of all their cards in their hand.
image for article on Durak card game

Image credit: Vector Point Studio/Shutterstock

Rule Mastery: Elevating Your Game with Expert Strategies

As a game of attack versus defense, Durak naturally has various card game strategies in play. The strategies used in durak can prove to be very in-depth. We’ll attempt to summarize them slightly, to avoid writing a durak version of War and Peace.

  • The main strategy should be based around entering the latter stages of the game with as strong a hand of six cards as possible.
  • Players do not want to head into that latter stage with the odds stacked against them. A key approach here is to act aggressively early on and try to collect the strongest six card hand they can muster. This will then give them impetus heading into the latter stages.
  • When it comes to defending and attacking, players really need to play the scenario. The best approach to have for defending is to always assume the worst case scenario. If a situation arises that players are confident they can defend 90% of the time, then do so. Otherwise, surrender ASAP to avoid things spiraling out of control.
  • For attacking, it should be used as a tactic to get rid of bad cards early and save the stronger cards for later. Do not be tempted to bring in the big guns early in order to try and damage the prospects of a fellow player.
  • During the end phases of the game it is all about being decisive. Try to control as many Aces as possible. These are not only strong in defense but they are even more powerful in attack because they cannot be beaten.
  • Players should do everything they can to get rid of non-trump cards to focus on the more influential trump cards.

Can You Play Online?

Durak is available to play online for free versus a computer opponent and other human players.

Sites such as playok.com and durak.hlop.de offer durak play online for fun or points. It is also available to play on mobile platforms with apps based on the game listed in the Google Play Store and Apple Store.

Can You Gamble on Durak?

Because Durak has a defined winner in each round (the player who discards all their cards first) its an easy game to gamble on. Generally, each player puts a set amount into a communal pot, which the winner scoops.

Despite being a Russian game, gambling on Durak in Russia is a little more complicated. Gambling is only legal in Russia in four regions, after the government made all gambling illegal in 2009.

These four regions are Altai, Kaliningrad, Krasnodar, and Primorsky. Durak can be gambled on provided it takes place within the boundaries of these four regions. Likewise, Russians in those areas can access online casinos, which can banned in the rest of the country.

Of course, if you’re outside of Russia, you can gamble on Durak as much as you like (within the laws of your home country). While you won’t find Durak on as many casino sites as say, online poker or online blackjack, the game is slowly become more popular outside of Russia.

Title Image credit: E.O/Shutterstock

]]>
Texas Hold’em Hand Rankings – Which Poker Hands Beat Which? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/texas-holdem-poker-hands-beat/ Wed, 17 Jul 2024 09:42:10 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=6822 In Texas Hold’em poker, the hand rankings are as follows (from best to worst):

Texas Hold’em poker Hand Rankings

Poker hand rankings chart

Let’s explain what each hand ranking means in more detail:

  1. Royal flush: the highest possible straight flush containing T J Q K and A of the same suit. This is the strongest possible hand in Texas Hold’em that is guaranteed to win every time.
  2. Straight flush: five cards of the same suit in a sequence, such as 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s.
  3. Four of a kind or quads: Four cards of the same rank plus any other card, e.g. Q Q Q Q 2.
  4. Full house: three of a kind plus a pair, e.g. 9 9 9 5 5.
  5. Flush: Five cards of the same suit. There are four suits: clubs, diamonds, hearts, and spades. If all your five cards are in just one of these suits, you have a flush.
  6. Straight: Five cards in sequential order, provided they’re not all of the same suit, e.g. 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. Keep in mind that an ace can help form two straights in Hold’em, namely A 2 3 4 5 and T J Q K A.
  7. Three of a kind (trips): Three cards of the same rank coupled with any two non-paired cards, e.g. T T T 7 2.
  8. Two pair: Two cards of the same rank and two more different cards of the same rank, e.g. 9 9 5 5 J.
  9. One pair: Two cards of the same rank combined with three cards of different values. For example, K K 9 5 2 is a pair of kings.
  10. A high card: A hand containing five cards of different ranks and suits that don’t make any of the other combinations. For example, a hand like K, J, 7, 5, 2 is referred to as a king-high.

Suits have no ranking in poker, which means no suit is higher than another.

Poker hand values are exactly the same in 5 Card Draw and 7 Card Stud poker variations.

But How Do You Make Poker hands In Texas Hold’em?

In Hold’em, all players are dealt two face-down cards to start the hand. After that, five more community cards are dealt across the board for everyone to use.

All players can use all seven available cards to make the best possible five-card hand combination. This means that you can:

  • Use two cards from your hand and three community cards
  • Combine just one of your hole cards with four cards on the board
  • Use only the five community cards

Once it’s time for the showdown, the cards speak. When you turn over your hand, you’ll always play the best five-card hand possible.

There are usually no problems here as the dealer will compare all poker hands and announce the winner.

Comparing Hands In Hold’em To Determine The Winner

But what happens if two or more players have a poker hand from the same category? Who wins when everyone has two pairs or a straight?

The best piece of advice to make this distinction is to remember that, in Hold’em, you always start at the top. For example, it’s clear cut in a pair vs. pair scenario. A pair of aces beats a pair of kings. A pair of tens beats a pair of eights, etc.

In two pair situations, the top pair is the only relevant factor in determining the winner. If one player has K K 2 2 X and the other one has Q Q J J X, the one with the pair of kings wins.

Poker hands example

This is sometimes confusing for beginners because the other hand looks stronger, and it would be the case if card values were somehow added. But that’s not the case in Hold’em.

The same rule applies to full houses, where the player with the best three-of-a-kind combination will always win the pot. In straight and flush scenarios, the winner is determined by comparing the highest card in the combination.

For example:

  • 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 beats 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
  • Ah 9h 7h 5h 2h beats Kh Qh 9h 7h 5h

Finally, in the event that both players only have a high-card hand (no pair), the one with the highest card wins.

Of course, this only applies if there are no better combinations available on the board.

Resolving A Tie: The Role Of Kicker In Poker

Every now and again, it will happen that two players have the exact same poker hand. For example, they could both have two pairs, kings and tens. With players new to poker, this will often create a lot of confusion.

That said, the rules of Hold’em are very clear on how these situations are resolved. Kickers are compared, and whoever has the higher kicker wins.

For those unfamiliar with the poker lingo, kickers are those dangling cards in your hand that aren’t a part of any combinations. For example:

  • In a hand K K 7 7 J, the jack is the kicker card
  • If you have A A A 9 5, both 9 and 5 are “kickers”

So, in our kings and tens scenario, players would compare their fifth card. If one player had K K T T 7 and the other held K K T T Q, the pot goes to the player holding the queen.

Keep in mind that this rule only applies if a player’s hole card is higher than the available community cards. Remember, you always get to play the five best cards on the showdown.

Here’s a couple of scenarios with the same starting hands but different boards to clarify this further.

Example 1

Poker hands example

Player A has 9 8, and player B has 9 7. By the river, the board read 9 9 5 2 4. In this case, Player A wins because their kicker plays.

The best possible hand for Player A is 9 9 9 8 5, while the best hand for Player B is 9 9 9 7 5. The eight beats the seven, so Player A wins the pot.

Example 2

Poker hands example

Both players have the same starting poker hands as before 9 8 vs. 9 7, but this time the community board read 9 9 A J 2. In this scenario, the hand is a tie, and players will split the pot.

This is because both players have the exact same best five-card hand: 9 9 9 A J. Since both the 8 and the 7 are lower than the ace and the jack, they’re disregarded.

It may still seem a bit confusing, but you’ll get the hang of it as you play more.

Just try to keep two important rules in mind when figuring out which poker hands beat which:

  • The best possible five-card hand always plays
  • Always check at the top and work your way down

Once you learn all the hand rankings and memorize these important rules, you’ll no longer have any problems figuring out who wins at the showdown.

Holding The Nuts – When You Know You Can’t Lose

Unlike in some other poker variants, you’ll often find yourself in spots in Texas Hold’em where you know you have the best possible hand.

This is known as “the nuts” and it’s one of the best feelings you can have at the table.

This is possible because the game combines your hidden “hole” cards and community cards. Hence, there is plenty of information to work with.

For example, if you have Ah 5h and the board reads 9h 7h 2c 6c Qh, you have an ace-high flush and the best possible hand. There is no way for any other player to beat you.

Poker hands example

Albeit simple, this is another concept that beginners are sometimes confused about and will play their hand cautiously, even in spots where they can’t lose.

If you’re new to poker, I’d suggest you take your time reading the board and thinking about hands when making your decisions.

After you gather some experience, you’ll become much better at this, and it’ll become almost second nature.

What To Do With This Information

Obviously, you need to know which hands beat which to play the game. But why is this information so crucial if you know the dealer will always ensure the pot goes to the rightful owner?

The thing is, everything you do at the Hold’em table revolves around this concept.

You’ll be making your decisions based on the strength of your hand and the perceived strength of your opponent’s holdings. If you know a full house beats a flush, you’ll be less inclined to chase your flush draws on a paired board.

When you have a top pair with a weak kicker, you’ll know your hand is susceptible, and you need to proceed with caution.

For someone who’s been playing poker for any serious length of time, this information may seem trivial and redundant, but it’s far from it.

The fact is, I still come across people who haven’t mastered the basics and aren’t quite sure what to do with their hands. Yet, they decide to jump into the action and play for real money. It doesn’t happen very often, but it’s not something you’d ever want – even in a friendly game where you’re playing for pennies.

At the lowest of stakes, it may only cause you some embarrassment but in any serious game, not being sure about which poker hands beat which can be a very costly mistake. It goes without saying that you can’t even begin to learn any more complex strategies before you master these basics.

Hand rankings are at the heart of all poker concepts, from the simplest ones to the ones used by those at the highest of stakes.

]]>
What Is Pai Gow Poker? Your Ultimate Playbook https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-pai-gow/ Tue, 16 Jul 2024 12:23:39 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=41091 If you’re looking to learn how to play Pai Gow poker, you’re in luck — it’s much simpler than forms of poker like Texas Hold’em and Omaha.

Here are the quick essentials:

  • Pai Gow poker used the traditional poker hand ranking system.
  • Pai Gow poker is played with a 53-card deck rather than 52-card — it includes one joker!
  • Players compete against the dealer or ‘banker’ rather than each other.

As you can see, Pai Gow is a fun game to play against ‘the House’ — you aren’t trying to take money away from other players! The rush comes from winning money against the casino.

Here are the poker hand rankings in case you need an easy reference cheat sheet:

Pai Gow Poker Hand Rankings

1. Royal Flush: A, K, Q, J, 10, all of the same suit.

2. Straight Flush: Five consecutive cards of the same suit.

3. Four of a Kind: Four cards of the same rank.

4. Full House: Three of a kind combined with a pair.

5. Flush: Five cards of the same suit, not in sequence.

6. Straight: Five consecutive cards of different suits.

7. Three of a Kind: Three cards of the same rank.

8. Two Pair: Two pairs of cards of the same rank.

9. One Pair: Two cards of the same rank.

10. High Card: The highest card if no other hand is made.

what is pai gow - card hand rankings

How Is The Joker Used In Pai Gow?

“But what about the joker?” you may ask. How does he come into play with the Pai Gow hand rankings?

In Pai Gow Poker, the joker can be used in a few different ways:

  • Ace: When used alone, the joker can be an ace.
  • Wild: In straights, flushes, and straight flushes, the joker can be wild and used as any card in the deck. For example, when used to complete a flush, the joker represents the highest value card that’s not already in the hand.
  • Complete a straight or flush: The joker can be used to complete a straight or flush in the backhand, or five-card hand.

What this means is that the joker serves as a special conditional wildcard. You can’t use him to play just any card, but rather a completion card. Or, again, alone simply as an ace. His appearance naturally makes it easier to achieve a high hand ranking, and, if utilized correctly, can significantly increase your Pai Gow poker payouts.

NOTE: Certain card rooms and casinos have their own deviations of these Pai Gow poker rules. They can definitely vary, so make sure to check with wherever you plan on playing.

Pai Gow Poker Rules

Let’s explore how to play Pai Gow poker in detail. In this game, up to six players face off against the dealer or banker, whom we’ll consistently refer to as the dealer.

Each player — including the dealer — receives seven cards. These seven cards are used to form two separate hands, hence why Pai Gow poker is also alternatively known as ‘Double Hand Poker’. One hand is designated as the ‘high hand’ and the other as the ‘low hand’.

The high hand must be stronger than the low hand.

For instance, if your low hand is a pair of Kings, your high hand must be at least a pair of Aces or higher, such as two pairs or better holdings.

  • The high hand must be made-up of five cards.
  • The low hand must be made-up of two cards.

Because of this, the low hand will always be a pair or two high-ranking cards.

If the rare situation arises where the high hand is not stronger than the low hand, the player is considered to have ‘miss-set’ their hand. This results in a foul and an automatic loss! Make sure to be careful when you’re new to the game and refer to the above Pai Gow poker hand rankings as needed.

Most casinos will allow you to bring your own print-out or electronic guide for easy reference, as this doesn’t give you an edge over the casino and you’re not competing against other players. Be gentle with yourself as you master the Pai Gow poker rules and do not play in settings that make you uncomfortable. This includes table limits.

Next in understanding the Pai Gow poker rules comes betting — each table has their own minimums and maximums. These min/max limits will determine the size of the game, meaning how much you can win or lose at a time. As stated, stick to table stakes you can afford.

If both your 5-card hand and your 2-card hand beat the dealer’s hands, you win the round and collect double the bet you placed. If both of your hands lose to the dealer’s hands, you lose your bet, and the dealer adds it to their bank. If you win one hand and the dealer wins the other, the round ends in a “push,” where there is no winner, your bet is returned, and the game moves on to the next round. Pushes are very common.

Naturally the goal is to be the net winner.

As a recap, these are the three outcomes:

  • Win = collect double your bet.
  • Lose = dealer takes your bet.
  • Push = your bet is returned, but the House still takes a commission.

Step-by-Step Gameplay

Here’s how Pai Gow poker gameplay begins:

  1. Before the cards are dealt, each player places their bet.
  2. Seven cards are dealt face down to each player.
  3. Players rearrange their cards into a high hand and a low hand.
  4. The dealer reveals their seven cards face up and arranges them into a high hand and a low hand.
  5. To win a round, both your high hand and low hand must be better than the dealer’s high hand and low hand.

On a casino Pai Gow table, you will typically see the letters “H” and “L” indicating where to place your high and low hands. This makes it easy to see who wins.

A time where the winner may seem less clear is when the player and dealer have identical hands. The result is that the dealer wins! They will claim the bet, tragically.

Poker table with hand of cards for 'what is pai gow'

Lead image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Pai Gow Poker Odds

Be aware that this is a typical gambling casino game — the Pai Gow poker odds are not in your favor. The House edge may seem small but it’s not insignificant. It is impossible to tip the Pai Gow poker odds in your favor.

  • For every push, the casino usually takes a 5% ‘commission’ or rake.
  • If a player holds the same hand as the dealer, the dealer wins.
  • Pai Gow has a lower House edge than double-zero roulette, but higher than baccarat.

The house edge in Pai Gow poker is estimated to be between 2% and 3%. For comparison, the house edge on a double-zero roulette wheel is over 5%, while a single-zero roulette wheel has a house edge of about 2.7% — similar to Pai Gow poker payouts.

The standard baccarat house edge is close to a low 1% making it theoretically nearer to breakeven, but you’d be surprised how much money people can lose even at a 1% disadvantage because it compounds over time.

You can improve your odds slightly by playing as the banker because you win in the case of a tie. Casinos typically offer players the opportunity to act as the banker, which is a better mathematical proposition, even though you absorb greater financial risk. Still, the overall odds remain unfavorable due to the game’s inherent house edge.

Pai Gow Poker Strategy

While the overall odds of winning in the long run may be a deterrent, there are still strategic ways to play more effectively in the short term.

Hand Setting Strategy:

  • High Hand Priority: Always prioritize setting a strong high hand. This is crucial because the high hand must beat the dealer’s high hand to win the bet.
  • Low Hand Strategy: The low hand should be strong enough to ensure a better chance of winning one hand if splitting with the dealer. Aim for a pair of high-ranking cards or a low pair.

Splitting Pairs:

  • Optimal Pair Splitting: When dealt pairs, strategize to split them between the high and low hands effectively. For instance, with a pair of Aces, place one Ace in the low hand and the other in the high hand to maximize both hands’ strength.

Managing Joker Strategy:

  • Utilizing the Joker: If dealt a Joker, consider it as an Ace unless it can complete a straight or flush in the high hand. In the low hand, the Joker can be beneficial in completing a flush or straight, but ensure it’s used wisely to avoid weakening the high hand.

Banking Strategies:

  • Advantages of Banking: Opt to be the banker whenever possible. While it requires a larger bankroll, being the banker gives you a slight statistical advantage due to winning ties. But you must manage your bankroll effectively to withstand potential losses when playing as the banker.

Understanding House Edge:

  • House Edge Awareness: Recognize that Pai Gow Poker typically carries a house edge of around 2% to 3%, which is lower than many other casino games like double-zero roulette or slots. However, this edge can impact long-term profitability, so play with a strategic mindset to mitigate losses. This means recognizing when it’s time to walk away — if you’ve won, you’ve already defied the odds. Take the money and run!

Before wagering real money, you can learn how to play Pai Gow poker by practicing online or in free-play modes offered by some casinos. This allows you to familiarize yourself with hand setting, strategies, and the flow of the game without financial risk.

Pai Gow Perfection: Wrapping Up Your Play Guide

Pai Gow poker demands a blend of skill and good grasp of probabilities. By mastering Pai Gow poker strategy and understanding the game’s nuances, you can significantly improve your chances of success. Remember, while luck plays a role, a well-thought-out strategy can tilt the odds closer to your favor… although the House still always wins!

If you’d like to grow your Pai Gow poker skills, or just your poker skills in general, check out the articles below. Packed with tips and tricks from poker experts, they’ll have you on the high-rollers table in no time!

Lead image credit: Victor Moussa/Shutterstock

]]>
Everything You Need To Know About Single Deck Blackjack https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/single-deck-blackjack/ Tue, 25 Jun 2024 10:22:16 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=40851 Single deck blackjack is the simplest form of the game and offers a house edge which is smaller than games with multiple decks.

The first thing we need to do when examining single deck blackjack is to present a chart of basic blackjack strategy. Many sites have broken down this chart into three separate sections: hard totals, soft totals and pairs. Below, we have grouped them altogether for one simple single-deck blackjack cheat sheet.

Single Deck Blackjack Chart

Single Deck Blackjack Strategy Chart All Rules

Single Deck Blackjack vs Multideck

Single deck blackjack offers the player better chances to win than multi-deck. The house take is low even when the deck is shuffled after each hand.

Typically the return to player (RTP) on the best single deck game is 99.8%, whereas with 6 or 8 decks the RTP is around 99.5%.

This difference might not seem that significant, but if you start with a deposit of $100, you might place 1000 bets of $10 each. At the end of that time you would have, on average, $80 remaining at 99.8% but only $50 remaining if the RTP is 99.5%??

Of course, with just a smidgeon of good luck you can come out ahead and most of the welcome offers cover the potential loss.

Perfect play, particularly with more than one seat at single-deck, is quite complicated, but, if you follow the chart above, you will do well.

Wizard of Odds claims that Boss Media has a single-deck game with a payout of 100.15%, but I did not find it when I went through all the casinos on the site!

When To Take Insurance With Single-Deck Blackjack

Deciding whether to take insurance involves counting. It pays 2-1, and there are 41 cards remaining if you play five seats. If more than 13 of them are tens, then you should take the insurance bet. So, if you have seen only one or two tens, then it is right to take insurance.

The maximum number of tens on the table for it to be correct to take insurance depends on the number of seats playing, according to the following table:

SeatsTens
1
20
30
41
52

If you are playing 2 or 3 seats, if you can see no ten on the table, then you should take insurance.

Counting Cards In Single Deck Blackjack

Every online single-deck game I have seen – and I have looked at over 140 online casinos who have welcome offers (most for slots) – shuffle after every hand.

If you think you can count, then there are many live-dealer games with six or more decks dealt from a shoe, which give the counter an edge, and that would be the subject of another article.

In Las Vegas, however, the couple of remaining single-deck games I have seen shuffle after about half a deck, and counting is relevant to the second and subsequent hands. The casino may well ask customers to leave, however, if they increase their bet dramatically when the count is high. But this is true of all blackjack games.

Choosing An Online Casino For Single Deck Blackjack

It is very important to play only at reputable licensed casinos.? Taking advantage of offers to join, and then playing single-deck blackjack correctly, gives you every chance to come out ahead. But, if there is a danger of not being paid, you want to avoid the site. Often bonuses seem too good to be true, and you should read the terms carefully, but more importantly, only play at top-rated casinos.

I did not find any single-deck games using the increasingly popular live-dealer method in which the cards are dealt with a shoe and shuffled in full view of the players.

This is partly because the cards would have to be shuffled after each hand, or the player would have a clear advantage, and this takes time. Secondly, it requires a dealer all the time which costs money. Playing more than one deal without a shuffle gives the player a significant advantage.

If you follow even just one principle, that should be to play only games that offer the fairer odds of 3 to 2 for blackjack. Offering 6 to 5 adds around 1.3% to the house edge.

Terms and Conditions

It is important to read the terms and conditions before signing up for a site which gives a welcome bonus, typically 100% of the amount you deposit. You would normally have to play through the bonus 35 times or more before you can withdraw your winnings.

Most sites also assign a percentage contribution to each game, and blackjack is usually 10% or 0%. If the latter, and you don’t want to play online slots or scratchcards, then you can look elsewhere.

Of course, you don’t have to take the bonus, but if you want to play a lot, then choose the site with the best bonus terms.

Best Single-Deck Blackjack Casino

Pride of place must go to MrVegas.com. It took me 43 seconds to open an account and no time at all to find the single-deck blackjack games on there. Both were by Microgaming. The five-seat game offers a slightly higher return:

One game had a single seat and another allowed play on up to five seats. They claimed a return to player of 99.7%, with perfect play. This tallies with simulations on my software Diable, which gives 99.81%. Both games have the same rules: Dealer peeks on tens or aces, no double after split, doubles only on 9, 10 and 11, and dealer must hit soft 17. This appears to be common for Microgaming.

Other Single-Deck Blackjack Casinos

  1. HippodromeOnline.com: The single deck Blackjack that they provide has a RTP of 99.7%.
  2. 32Red.com: Has the same single-deck Blackjack and a generous bonus.
  3. MrQ.com: They have two single-deck Blackjack games. Both multi-hand. The RTP is stated to be 99.9%.
  4. PinkCasino.com: Has the same single deck game, with an RTP of 99.7%.
  5. 21Casino.com: Has the same 99.7% single deck game as above.
  6. Peachygames.com: At the time of writing, the bonus CAN be used on Blackjack, so this is quite attractive as the game of Single Deck Vegas Blackjack has an RTP of 99.8%.
  7. VirginGames.com: This casino only admits UK players. Their single-deck games have an RTP of about 99.8% They also have a new single deck game with a side bet on the first three cards forming a straight flush, trips, straight of flush at 10-1. This is a bet to be avoided though as the RTP is only 95.48%. ?
  8. JackpotJoy.com: Has two single deck games – one with the same 10-1 bet on the first three cards.
  9. Playgrand.com: Has a single-deck game and, at the time of writing, allows blackjack to count as 10% for the wagering requirement with a standard 100% deposit bonus and play through requirement.
  10. Betway.com: This is one of the best known names in the casino industry. They have a single-deck blackjack game with a return of 99.7%. Highly recommended – especially as they sponsor Arsenal!

Live Single Deck Blackjack In Vegas

Only two casinos were offering a single-deck game in Las Vegas, in October when I went for G2E, the International Casino Exhibition, in October.

One was El Cortez in Downtown Vegas, at 600 E Fremont Street.? Their website now says that they only offer double-deck however.

Silverton Casino Lodge, 3333 Blue Diamond Road, has single-deck blackjack and both El Cortez and Silverton pay 3 to 2 for Blackjack. This is the first question to ask, as paying 6 to 5 is very hard to beat. Someone on a forum claimed that Silverton had gone to 6 to 5, but I cannot verify that.

There is certainly a single-deck game in the casinos of West Wendover, Nevada, and, like a remote beach, this city has not been discovered by that many players yet! Single-deck games are also offered at casinos on some Indian reservations. Atlantic City does not have a single-deck game of which I am aware.

I am a member of many casinos in the UK (apart from one that excluded me!) and am not aware of any single-deck games. Two-deck games are common in European casinos, but again I do not know of any single-deck games.

Cheat Sheet for Microgaming Single-Deck Game

(Hole Card, Dealer Peeks, Dealer Hits Soft17, Double Hard 9-11 Only, No Double after Split, One Card to Split Aces)

Cheat Sheet for Microgaming Single-Deck Game

*13 v 2 is a stand, whatever the composition, although Wizard thinks 10-3 v a 2 is a hit. Some three or four-card totals can be slightly different, but the error would be tiny.

Lead image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

]]>
Gambling: Pure Luck or Total Skill? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/gambling-pure-luck-total-skill/ https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/gambling-pure-luck-total-skill/#comments Mon, 17 Jun 2024 16:05:46 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=2180 Whether gambling is based on luck or skill depends on the specific game being played.

For instance, games like slot machines, roulette, and lotteries depend almost entirely on luck. The outcomes are random and there is no strategy that can change what is essentially a random draw or spin.

On the other hand, certain games such as poker, blackjack, and sports betting do involve a significant element of skill. Knowledge, experience, and strategic decision-making can greatly affect the outcome of these games.

But remember, regardless of whether a game is primarily based on luck or skill, the house usually has an edge, and all forms of gambling have potential risks and should be approached responsibly.

Examples Of Luck vs Skill

Here are three different scenarios; see if you can spot the difference.

Scenario 1:

It’s the final of the World Series of Poker. Player A has bet all his chips with a made straight. He is all-in and is waiting for his opponent, Player B, to make a decision. Player B, meanwhile, is sitting with a nut flush draw with two cards to go.

Player B knows he has only a handful of potential cards in the deck that can improve his hand, and figures that his ‘hand odds’ are about 4/1. However, if he bets and wins the hand, his pot odds – ie. the amount of chips he stands to gain – is roughly 8/1. Statistically, then, does he gamble and play the favorable odds, or fold, wait for another good spot, and avoid the gamble altogether?

Scenario 2:

Here’s our next scenario: it’s a soccer qualifier for the World Cup. With a matter of seconds remaining, and the home team needing to score to win the match and qualify for the finals, needs to go all-out. With virtually the last kick of the match, the home team’s striker launches a speculative ball into the opposing team’s penalty area, it ricochets off the goalpost, back off a defender, and into the goal. The winning team celebrate their outrageous luck wildly.

Scenario 3:

Finally, a gambler in a Vegas casino walks up to a roulette table, closes his eyes and throws a large stack of $100 chips onto no. 36, then waits for the ball to come to a rest. The ball duly hits 36, he picks up his $3,500 winnings and walks off.

So, of those scenarios, which are games of skill and which luck?

If you listen to the lawmakers, depending where you are, soccer is the sport, poker the game of skill and chance, and roulette the game of complete chance.

But why? What part did luck play in those three games, and how much skill really features in classic games of chance?

Poker As A Game Of Skill

poker

Let’s take a look at poker first, as more than any other games, poker is the one most fiercely debated as regards to its skill vs. gamble elements.

The adage goes that for recreational poker players, poker is 30 percent skill and 70 percent luck, while for pros those figures are reversed.

In an article called “The Role of Skill versus Luck in Poker: Evidence from the World Series of Poker” by Steven D. Levitt and Thomas J. Miles, a group of highly skilled poker players at the 2010 World Series of Poker were analyzed. That set of players achieved an average return on investment (ROI) of over 30 percent, compared to a -15 percent for all other players at the tournament.

If poker was a game of pure luck, as many jurisdictions around the world surmise, then why do the best players in the world constantly reach final tables at big tournaments?

While it’s true that calculating odds does play a part in poker as we saw in our first example – after all, a large part of poker is based on the turn of a card – there are so many other elements to the game that poker can never be treated truly as a game of chance.

And while for every winner in poker there has to be a loser – those buy-ins have to go somewhere – employing skill in poker allows the top players to override the luck factor.

Soccer – A Game Of Chance?

Let’s go back to our soccer analogy. Tom Tango, author of ‘The Book: Playing the Percentages in Baseball’, suggested that if you consider just games where a team wins or loses (draws in games make the calculations far too complicated) luck actually plays a bigger factor in sports results than you expect.

In fact, when applying Tango’s calculations to soccer over a typical 10-month season, variations in results due to luck accounts for around 35% of the total variance (luck) leaving around 65% attributed to talent. This is good news for the skillful footballers as talent has approximately double the effect on a team’s win percentage that luck has.

However, this still means that around one third of a team’s win percentage is purely down to random chance. If that’s true, why isn’t soccer considered a game of chance like poker?

The Casinos’ Favorite Games

penny slots

At the end of the day, some games lend themselves to pure luck, and no system will ever work out in the long-term.

Take roulette or video slots. Played sensibly, with the most conservative odds selected, both games can win you a few nice wins in the short-term, but played out for long enough will most likely leave you in the red.

It’s no mystery that land-based casinos will cram their floor space with the most profitable games for them. Per square meter, roulette and slots ‘earn’ the casino much more than say, a poker table, ever would.

And there’s a good reason – the chances of winning at those games are so much lower than a skill-based game like poker where you have to bring at least some knowledge to the table – or even blackjack, which offers players a more favorable house edge than its table game rivals. And that’s not even taking into account the house edges that roulette or blackjack that are skewed in favor of the casinos. Not only do gamblers have to win over chance, they have to win over the casino’s own odds too.

The Gambler’s Fallacy

The gambler’s fallacy, also known as the Monte Carlo fallacy, is the mistaken belief that if something happens more frequently than normal during some period, then it will happen less frequently in the future, presumably as a means of balancing nature.

This fallacy can arise in many practical situations although it is most strongly associated with gambling where such mistakes are common among players. However, the problem is it’s utterly wrong.

The most famous example came in a game of roulette in a Monte Carlo casino in 1913 (hence the name) when the ball fell in black 26 times in a row. Gamblers lost millions betting against black, incorrectly assuming that a long streak of red was overdue.

Las Vegas: Built on Luck

The fallacy remains to this day. Visit any casino and you’ll see gamblers furiously scribbling down the previous numbers on a strip of card, or frantically scouring the casino’s digital board displaying the last dozen numbers, as if ‘chance’ knows what’s come up before and will somehow redress the balance at some point.

If that was the case, Vegas wouldn’t have multi-billion dollar casinos, 20-storey hotels, and penthouse suites on tap. It’s all the gamblers who’ve bought into the fallacy who have helped pay for those suites.

Everyone Needs a System

Other than ‘don’t play’, every gambler needs a system to over-ride any variance, or luck, that sitting down at a table will inevitably bring.

The infamous Martingale system will have been toyed with by every gambler at some point (before, hopefully, being thrown in the general direction of the garbage bin) and it works something like this:

Let’s say you bet $5 on Red at a roulette table, and you lose. The next spin you double your bet, to $10, and keep going until you win. Therefore, your first win would help recoup all of your previous losses, as well as give you a profit equal to the initial stake.

That system sounds fine, except for one small problem: most gamblers, unless you’re a Russian oil tycoon, have a finite bankroll, and will inevitably go bust before the system can bear fruit. Any in any case, casinos generally have a stop button applied to losing gamblers: they will simply pull the plug if you lose too much.

Where Casino Systems Fall Down

On most, if not all, roulette tables around the world there will be a table limit – a maximum bet that once reached you cannot increase your bets any further. The maximum bet varies, but it is generally in the region of 500 – 5,000 times the minimum bet. This means that, even at the upper end of the table limit scale, you cannot exceed 13 losing spins.

Just look at that 20-storey Vegas hotel – it’s living, breathing proof that systems on roulette don’t work.

How Can you Override the Luck Factor?

So, can systems ever work in gambling games?

Even with a game that features a healthy skill element like poker, ALL players will experience a spell of bad variance and go bust – the luck may just not be with the players, even if they’re making sound betting decisions.

So, how can gamblers override the chance factor? With casino games that rely on luck so much, the easy answer is not to play at all. OK, so that’s a little simplistic, but simple bankroll management is the way for long-term success in ANY game involving odds. Play a strict percentage of your bankroll, bank winnings when you’re ahead, and take only ABC decisions that make good sense.

Taking on the Bookies’ Edge

Even good sports betting pros will gamble on Even money (1/1) or odds-on results, and avoid accumulators and wild bets like scorecasts that attract casual gamblers. There’s a reason bookies will advertise odds on a striker to score a hat-trick in a soccer match – because the chances of them doing that, especially if they’re going through a bad spell of form, are much lower than the odds the bookie are quoting.

Sports betting sites and bookies will skew the ‘true’ odds of anything happening (ie the true odds of someone scoring the first goal in a soccer match is generally much higher than the usual 6/1 or 7/1) but when gambling you’re not just taking on luck in itself, you’re taking on the house too.

But hit big, hit that ‘long shot’ and beat the house, and you’ll be quids in. Hit six numbers on the Lotto or that slots progressive jackpot for mere dollars and those astronomical odds will have been hit. It’s the ultimate temptation – bet small, win big, and spend the rest of your life on a luxury yacht sipping champagne having ‘cheated’ luck – and the house too.

Can We Avoid Luck

Luck, or chance, is inherent in everything we do. Get knocked over by a car, win a raffle prize or get struck by lightning – all involve chance, and just as in gambling, it’s how you play your luck that’s the key thing.

So, stick to games with favorable house edges or skill/gambling games like poker, and study, practice systems, do your legwork and make the odds work in your favor. It’s either that of give up gambling altogether.

And that doesn’t really appeal, does it?

]]>
https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/gambling-pure-luck-total-skill/feed/ 7
The Hidden Potential Of Baccarat Side Bets Explained https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/baccarat-side-bets/ Thu, 06 Jun 2024 10:13:31 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=40466 Baccarat side bets are bonus bets found in online casinos, separate to the main wager on whether the Player or Banker will win the round. The baccarat gambling community love placing wagers on side bets because they increase the risk and the fun of the game, and of course, boast some high paying odds.

What Are Baccarat Side Bets?

Baccarat side bets are optional wagers players can make before a game of baccarat begins. Different baccarat variants offer a set combination of side bets. You can check online baccarat table layouts to make sure the game offers the side bets you’re most interested in.

Side bets make the game of baccarat exciting because there are more ways to win and most of the payouts are higher than even-money odds.

It’s important to note however, that house edge percentages on certain side bets fluctuate vastly based on what cards are still in a shoe. Depending on the cards remaining, the odds of winning a side bet can significantly increase or decrease.

If you want to place a side bet, you do so at the start of each round, before the cards are drawn for the main Player and Banker hands.

Now, let’s look at a range of side bets and how they work.

Tie Side Bet

The Tie side bet in baccarat is the most popular. It’s a wager that the game will end in a tie, meaning that the total value of the Player’s hand and the Banker’s hand are equal.

The tie side bet payoff is usually 8:1 and the house edge is 14.3%.

Pair Side Bets

The Pair side bet features in most online baccarat games.

A valid Pair is the result of the first two cards drawn to the Player’s hand or the Banker’s hand. There are four pair side bets you can choose to wager on. The payoff odds for each are as follows:

  • Player Pair: 11:1
  • Banker Pair: 11:1
  • Either Player or Banker Pair: 5:1
  • Perfect Pair (pair of the same rank and suit): 25:1

The Perfect Pair house edge = 13.03%. The Player or Banker Pair house edge = 10.36%.

Some online baccarat versions offer 200:1 payout odds (and sometimes more) for double Perfect Pairs. For this baccarat side bet bonus to succeed, the Player and Banker hands must each form a perfect pair in the same round.

Super 6 Baccarat Side Bet

A bet placed on the Super 6 side bet wins when the Banker’s hand has a total value of six (with two or three cards) and beats the Player hand that has a lower total value.

Some baccarat table rules allow players to place a Super 6 side bet without betting on any of the main Player or Banker betting options.

The Super 6 payoff odds are as follows:

  • Winning Super 6 side bets on two cards pays 12 to 15:1
  • Winning Super 6 side bets on three cards pays 20 to 23:1

The house edge on 12:1 payout odds is 29.98%.

The house edge increases from 1.06% in the normal game—when you pay commission on banker wins—to 1.45% when you don’t. This is because you’ll only get paid out 50% (or 1:2 payout odds) of a winning banker bet, when the banker’s hand forms a Super 6.

The Panda 8 Side Bet

A Panda 8 side bet wins when the Player’s hand forms a total of 8 points with three cards and beats the Banker’s hand. If the first two cards for the Player totals an 8 (a Natural) this is not a winning Panda 8 side bet.

A winning Panda 8 side bet pays out at 25:1 and the house edge is 10.19%.

If you place a main bet on the Player’s hand and a Panda 8 is formed and beats the Banker hand, you’ll be paid out for the main Player bet, as well as the Panda 8 side bet.

The Dragon 7 Side Bet

A Dragon 7 side bet wins when the Banker’s hand forms a total of 7 points with three cards and beats the Player’s hand.

This banker side bet is paid at 40:1 odds, and the house edge is 7.61%.

In the Dragon 7 baccarat variant, commission on winning banker bets is not deducted. However, in some baccarat variants, the casino has a rule that when the banker’s hand forms a Dragon 7, main banker bets are not paid. The bet becomes a push and only the Dragon side bet is paid out on.

The Dragon Bonus Side Bet

When you place a Dragon Bonus side bet, you can win payout odds from 2:1 to 30:1 when the Player’s hand or the Banker’s hand forms at least 4 points over the losing hand, and the winning hand total is formed using three cards.

You can place a Banker Dragon side bet or a Player Dragon side bet. Whatever Dragon Bonus side bet you choose to bet on, you should also place a bet on the main Banker or Player hands.

Natural winning hands (i.e., two cards forming 8 or 9) will be paid at 1:1 odds.

In case of a tie, Dragon Bonus side bets will push.

A winning hand ranges from 4 points to 9 points and must be formed using three cards (non-Natural hands).

Examples of Dragon Bonus side bets:

  1. The Player’s hand total consisting of three cards is 9, and the Banker’s hand is 0; the Player wins over Banker by 9 points. A Dragon Bonus side bet will payout 30:1.
  2. The Banker’s hand total consisting of three cards is 6, and the Player’s hand has 1 point; the Banker wins over the Player by 5 points. A Dragon Bonus side bet will payout 2:1.

Dragon Bonus payout odds:

  • 4 or 5 points: 2:1 (some table variants payout 1:1 for 4 points)
  • 6 points: 4:1
  • 7 points: 6:1
  • 8 points: 10:1
  • 9 points: 30:1

Dragon Bonus house edges:

  • Dragon Bonus house edge on Player = 2.65%
  • Dragon Bonus house edge on Banker = 9.37%

Winning Multiple Baccarat Side Bets

If you make multiple baccarat side bets, it’s possible to win more than one side bet in the same round. For example, let’s say you bet Banker Pair and Super 6 and the result of the hand is as follows:

  • Player’s Hand = 10? and 2? so the total = 12
  • Banker’s Hand = 3? and 3? so the total = 6 (Pair of 3s)
  • Player draws a 3rd card which is a 2?. Therefore, the Player’s final hand total = 4 points.
  • Result: The Banker’s hand beats the Player’s hand with 6 points over 4.

In the above example, you would win both your Banker Pair and Super 6 side bets.

The more side bets you bet on the more winning combinations are possible.

FAQs About Baccarat Side Bets

Are side bets bad in baccarat?

Side bets in baccarat are only bad if you don’t understand the odds and expect to win too often. Players use different baccarat game strategies to try and win the high paying odds that baccarat side bets offer. Of course, the house edges on side bets will be higher, too.

If you can grasp the probabilities of winning or losing side bets, you can control how much you’re prepared to risk.

What are the best side bets in baccarat?

Pairs, Ties and Dragon Bonus side bets are the most popular among baccarat players. Super 6, Dragon 7 and Panda 8 side bets tend to be bet on when one or more hasn’t occurred for a while.

How do you place a side bet in baccarat?

You normally have to place a bet on Player or Banker in order to be allowed to place certain side bets. Available side bets in baccarat can be viewed on the table layout. Players look out for the options to wager on side bets and place chips by clicking or tapping the screen before cards are drawn for each baccarat round.

Baccarat Side Bets Conclusion

A beginner playing baccarat will quickly learn how to bet on the main Banker and Player hands. Progressing to wager on side bets increases the risk, but also the fun—especially when side bets win.

The house edges on side bets are higher, though payoffs could give players a winning edge— but only if they’re fortunate enough to win on them.

You can bet on multiple side bets before each baccarat round begins. Staking money on baccarat side bets may not increase your chances of winning, but they increase anticipation and excitement.

Lead image credit: sakadaphoto/Shutterstock

]]>
Craps Dice Control: Can You Control What You Roll? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/craps-dice-control/ Wed, 22 May 2024 08:37:41 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=40057 Craps dice control is an alleged skill where the person rolling the dice – known as The Shooter – can “set” the dice in a certain way before throwing them, and by so doing, cause them to roll whichever number they want. But how can you control the dice, if at all?

How To Control The Dice In Casino Craps

There are three main methods to craps dice control: Grip, Throw, and Set, as explained below.

1. The Grip

This is how you hold the dice.

To control the dice in casino craps, first grip them between the thumb and forefinger. This will allow you to hold the two dice together tightly, while at the same time showing the dealers that you aren’t trying to shave or replace, or otherwise manipulate or cheat the dice.

2. The Throw

Many craps players will just cup the dice, shake them in their fist, and then throw them wildly down the table where they hit the pyramid-foam padding on the other side. The dice will then bounce around wildly before coming to a stop.

But a player who practices dice control in craps will first grip the dice correctly, and then gently throw them in an arc (a parabolic toss). This causes the dice to sail in a curve from the Shooter’s grip to the other side of the craps table, where they will come to a more gentle stop.

This way, they are more likely to come to rest displaying the number that the Shooter wanted to roll.

They will still hit the pyramid-foam backing of the craps table, which is a requirement for a legitimate throw in the game of craps.

3. The Set

Craps dice setting is a method practiced by craps players in order to roll certain numbers more frequently, or to avoid certain numbers – like the dreaded 7 after the Point has been established. There are several popular ways to set dice in craps, described below.

How To Set The Dice In Craps: Popular Dice Control Sets

The practice of dice setting is designed to reduce the house edge on craps bets, creating situations where the Shooter rolls numbers to their advantage, before crapping out.

1. The Hardways Set (How to set dice to avoid a 7)

Hardways Dice Set for 4 and 4

Primarily designed to avoid the 7, this is often the most popular Set with novice players.

As the name suggests, this Set is designed to match two “hardways” on the dice.

For example, in the image above, we have the 4 and 4 which is known as the 8 Set. But this can also be 5 and 5, which will be known as the 10 Set, 3 and 3 which is the 6 Set, and 2 and 2 which is the 4 Set.

2. The 3-V Set (How to set dice to roll a 6 or 8)

The 3-V Set for Casino Craps

The 3V Set is where you set the dice with a 3 and a 3 in a way which makes the “V” shape, as in the image above.

This is used mostly for rolling 6’s and 8’s.

3. The 2-V Set (How to set dice to roll a 4 or 10)

The 2-V Set for Casino Craps

This is where you set the dice as 2 and 2 in a way which forms a “V” shape, as in the photo above. This Set is used for rolling 4’s and 10’s.

4. The All-7 Set (How to set dice to roll a 7)

One of the All-7 Sets for Casino Craps

This is used especially for the come out roll, and is designed to roll a 7. There are four possible Sets, which are: 2–5, 5–2, 4–3 and 5–2. One such example is above.

5. The Crossed 6’s Set (How to set dice to roll a 12)

The Crossed-6 Set for Casino Craps

Usually used for come out rolls, this Set can roll 10’s, 4’s, 5’s and 9’s, as well as a few craps hits.

It is known as the Crossed 6 Set because the 6 and 6 on the dice are set in a crossed way, as shown in the image.

6. The Straight 6’s Set (How to set dice to avoid a 7)

The Straight-6 Set for Casino Craps

This is a Set designed to avoid a 7 by blocking at least one of the dice from rolling the 6. It is called the Straight 6 Set because the dice are set parallel.

What Are The Best Dice Control Sets?

If you want to make the game of casino craps even more fun than it is already, you can try to practice dice control, and see how this works out for yourself. This being the case, then I’d recommend the Hardways Set for the game in progress, and the All-7’s Set and the Crossed-6s Set on the come out roll.

Don’t forget, there are many other craps strategies that you can implement.

Is Craps Dice Control Cheating?

Dice control in casino craps is NOT cheating, because the human Shooter is NOT altering the dice in any way, or using some mechanical device to control the dice. However, some casinos may frown on this practice, similar to the skill of counting cards in blackjack.

That said, most casinos will let you try dice control in craps, because it is not considered to be an actual skill.

Craps dice control cannot be verified as a skill because casino craps is an “independent” game, as opposed to blackjack, which is a “dependent” game (at least on those games which use a pre-shuffled deck, or decks, of cards).

What are Dependent or Independent Games?

All casino games are divided into two groups: “dependent games” and “independent games.” These are mathematical terms related to the probability of an event happening.

Dependent Games:

Games like blackjack are called dependent games because the value of the cards which are yet to be dealt from the deck(s) of cards, are directly dependent on which cards have already been dealt (and therefore are no longer available in the deck).

This is the reason why card counting is considered a skill. By keeping track of which cards have already been dealt, the card counter is able to more accurately anticipate which cards are still left to play.

Some casinos use a continuous shuffling machines however, which would make the game independent.

Independent Games:

Casino dice games like craps are called independent games because each throw of the dice is mathematically and probabilistically independent of any and all other throws.

This means that no matter what numbers the dice have rolled in the past, NONE of this has ANY bearing on what number the dice will roll NOW.

This is similar to roulette, in that each new spin is it’s own event which has no bearing on whatever happened before.

Is Dice Control Legal?

Yes, craps dice control is legal. Do casinos like to see you do it? Not necessarily. But not because they are afraid of your skills as a dice control specialist.

Instead, it’s because some players try to introduce shaved or weighted dice into the game, all of which are illegal.

And sometimes cheaters will also try to use outside devices to control the dice. For example, smudging the dice with a tiny bit of magnetic resin, and then using a magnet (usually in the hands or pockets of an accomplice on the other side of the table) to alter the randomness of the dice roll. Again, this is illegal.

Is Craps Dice Control Actually Effective?

Casinos will stop you from playing blackjack in their casinos if they think you are truly a good card counter. And that’s because card-counting in blackjack is a known skill.

But casinos will let you try dice control – and that should answer all your questions about this.

So the simple answer is: No. Dice control is a myth.

Dice control may appear to work in the short-term. But that’s just probability at work. Anomalies will occur in everything, regardless of the overall percentages, house edge, and general probabilities.

But, over time, all events will roughly equate to their probabilistic expectations, and the math of the game will prevail.

The casino works on this percentage 24/7. But the dice player will only play a few hours. So, the casino will experience millions of events, while the player will see – at best – only a few hundred. And that’s just the facts, folks.

Tips For Craps Dice Control

While the math of the game still rules, craps players who practice dice control will say that the trick is to KISS it. Meaning: Keep It Simple, Stupid.

By this they mean that the less complicated it is to make it, the easier it will be to do. But, realistically, there is no real science behind dice control. It is generally acknowledged as being a myth.

So until next time – best of luck to all!

Lead image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

]]>
The Craps Come Bet Explained: What Is It & How Does It Work? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/craps-come-bet/ Tue, 07 May 2024 08:55:31 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=39654 The come bet in craps is one of the game’s key wagers. Once the point has been established, you’re essentially betting that the next roll will be a 7 or 11. If it is, your Come bet wins. But of course, there’s a little more to it than that. Read on for an easy-to-follow run-through, covering:

What Is The Come Bet In Craps?

After the point is established – when the white hockey-puck-like marker is placed on one of the box numbers – you can make a Come bet in craps. This bet wins if the very next roll is a 7 or 11. It will lose if a 2, 3 or 12 is rolled.

If the numbers 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 are rolled, then the Come bet is moved to that box number. This bet will now win if the number is rolled again before any 7.

The Come bet works in a similar way to the Pass Line bet, and the house edge is about 1.4%.

Where Is The Come Bet On The Table Layout?

The Come bet in craps is made on a large area of the craps table layout, and is marked with the word “Come”. If you look at the photo below, you will see the Come bet area clearly marked in this way.

It is located just below the box numbers 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 and 10, and just above the Field area.

Craps Table Layout, with the Come Bet in the middle
Image credit: Betzaar.com/Wikipedia Commons, CC BY-SA 3.0

How To Make A Come Bet In Craps

On the New Come Out Roll (the start of a new round of gameplay), the person holding the dice will roll them on the craps table. This person is known as the shooter.

If they roll either a 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10 – which are collectively known as the box numbers – then this number is designated as the point. The dealers will now mark it by placing a hockey-puck-type marker on that number, with the white side up. That’s how everyone knows that this specified number is now the point.

Before the next roll, you can now make a come bet. You do this by placing your wager in the area marked “Come”. You do so in front of where you are standing at the craps table, so the dealer knows that this come bet belongs to you.

  • Your bet will now win if a 7 or 11 is rolled on the very next roll.
  • Your bet will lose if that roll makes either a 2, 3 or 12.
  • If neither of these are rolled, then this can only mean that one of the box numbers was rolled, and therefore your wager is now moved by the dealer to that box number.
  • Your Come bet will now win if that number is rolled again before any 7.
  • If any 7 is rolled before your Come bet number, then your wager will lose.

Once your Come bet is moved to one of the box numbers, you can make an additional wager on that number. You do this by placing what’s called “Odds” behind that number. It’s similar to placing Free Odds behind your Pass Line wager.

The Come Bet in craps works in a very similar way to your Pass Line wager. The difference is that the Come bet can only be made after the point has been established, and not before. The Pass Line wager can only be made before the Come Out Roll, and not after.

The Come Bet vs Pass Line Explained

A Pass Line bet in craps is a wager which is known as “betting with the shooter.” This means that you are wagering that the shooter will win – meaning that they will establish a point, and then roll that point number again before any 7.

A Come bet in craps works almost in the same way, except that you can only make the Come bet after the point has been established.

So, before the point is established, which is the New Come Out Roll, you can first make your Pass Line bet. Then, after the point has been established, you can make your Come Bet.

Once the point is established, you can place Free Odds behind your Pass Line wager.

But you can also place Free Odds behind your Come bet, once it has been moved to one of the box numbers.

Free Odds on the Come bet in craps work in the same way as Pass Line Free Odds: they are paid at true odds. Or in other words, the house has no edge on Free Odds. This has the effect of reducing the overall house edge on those bets.

The house edge on either the Pass Line bet or the Come bet in craps is about 1.4% without Odds. By placing Free Odds behind your Pass Line Bet or the Come Bet (once on the box number) you can lower the house edge to about 0.85% with Single Odds, and about 0.65% with Double Odds.

Come Bets Odds And Payouts

The base odds on Come bets and Pass Line bets are about 1.4% without Odds, about 0.85% with Single Odds, and about 0.65% with Double Odds.

In some craps casinos you may be able to make Free Odds many times, sometimes even as much as 100x Odds. At 100x Odds, the house edge on that wager reduces all the way down to about 0.02%.

Is The Come Bet A Good Bet In Craps?

Short answer? Yes.

But it depends. Like most things in casino gaming, the outcomes are based on statistical-equivalency models. This means that sometimes the game will be “Hot” (meaning the players will be winning a lot and often), while on other occasions the game will be “Cold” (meaning the players will be losing a lot and often).

So, in the end, the math will even out, and the Odds will equate to the expected payout percentages of the game.

That said, playing the Pass Line with Odds and Come bets with Odds are among the best betting choices in casino craps

What Is The Best Craps Come Bet Strategy?

So, what is the best strategy for Come bets in craps?

It kind of depends on the game. If you’re in a game where the shooter is hitting a lot of the box numbers, and NOT any 7, then it’s a good strategy to back your other wagers with the occasional Come bet. But remember that the Come bet will lose if a 2, 3 or 12 are rolled, and must be rolled again once moved to one of the box numbers BEFORE any 7.

Make A Hedge Bet

Since the odds say that about 11.2% of the time the Shooter WILL roll either the 2 or 3 or 12 (and therefore you will lose the Come bet), another way to enhance your Come bet strategy is to make what’s called a Hedge bet. Let’s look at an example of a hedge bet with a $5 Come bet and a $1 Prop bet known as “Any Craps”.

  • You first place your $5 Come bet wager, and then toss a $1 chip to the Stickman (that’s the dealer with the sick who moves the dice and chips around the table), and yell out “One dollar Any Craps.”
  • So your Come bet wins if a 7 or 11 is rolled, but will lose if a 2, 3 or 12 is rolled.
  • But now, if the shooter DOES roll either a 2 or 3 or 12, then your $5 Come bet will lose, BUT your Any Craps bet will WIN!
  • Since Any Craps is paid at 7:1, that means you’ll be paid a $7 winner for your $1 Any Craps wager. So, in the end, you lost $5 on the Come bet, but you won the $7 wager on Any Craps. This equals a $2 profit.

And that’s why this is called a Hedge Bet – you are “hedging” your loss against a kind of insurance.

But when you do this, you are basically betting against yourself and will eventually wind up losing overall.

That’s because the shooter has about a 11.2% chance of rolling a 2 or 3 or 12 (the “Any Craps”), a 22.2% chance of rolling either a 7 or 11, but about a 66.7% chance of rolling a 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10.

That’s why the Hedge bet in craps is often utilized by players based on their “feel” of how this game is going and how the shooter is rolling. It’s more experience, and not an exact science.

Place Odds Behind Your Come Bet

Another Come bet strategy in craps is to place Odds behind your Come bet once it’s moved to the box number rolled. This essentially backs up your Come bet. Your Odds bet wins if your original bet wins.

In most casinos you will be allowed to make up to a 3x Odds bet when the point is 4 or 10, up to 4x if the point is 5 or 9, and up to 5x if the point is 6 or 8.

As mentioned earlier, doing this lowers the total house edge. This is because while your initial Come bet has a small house edge, the Odds bet behind it has no house edge at all.

Lead image credit: JustAFewThings/Flickr, CC BY-NC-ND 2.0

]]>
Everything You Need To Know About The Craps Field Bet https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/craps-field-bet/ Wed, 01 May 2024 10:43:05 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=39687 A Field bet in craps is a one-roll bet on the 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11 and 12. The 2 and the 12 usually pay 2:1, while the other numbers pay 1:1 (also known as “even money). In some casinos, either the 2 or the 12 may pay 3:1, and that lowers the house edge on the Field bet from around 5.6% to around 2.8%. If a 5, 6, 7, or 8 is rolled, the Field bet loses.

Read on for a more in-depth walk-through. Skip to:

Where Is The Field Bet On The Table?

First, take a look at the photo below – this is a typical layout of a casino craps table. You will notice that the Field is a betting area just under the large Box marked “Come,” and above the smaller box marked “Don’t Pass.”

In between these two is the area marked as “Field.” And that’s where you make the Field bet in craps.

The craps table layout with field bet area shown
Image credit: Betzaar.com/Wikipedia Commons, CC BY-SA 3.0

You can also see this in the below photo, which shows an electronic craps table in a real casino.

Electronic craps table with field bet shown
Image credit: Victor Royer

What Is A Field Bet In Craps?

The Field is the part of the game where you can place one-roll wagers on the numbers 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11 and 12. The numbers 2 and 12 are usually highlighted on either side of the marked Field wagering area. This is because they usually pay a bonus. For example, paying 2:1 instead of just even-money, as with the other numbers in the Field.

But is some land-based and online casinos, they can pay more – depending on that casino’s bonus structure for craps bets.

But beware, because any time there’s a bonus being offered somewhere on the game, this usually means that there are lower, or lesser, odds on other bets elsewhere. This is to compensate for such “bonus” offerings, and to pay for their “costs” to the casino.

Craps Field Bets Odds And Payouts

Basically, the easier it is to roll a number, the less it will pay, and the harder it is to roll that number, the more it will pay.

For Field Bets, we are only interested in the numbers: 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11 and 12. These numbers are highlighted in the craps pyramid below, which shows how many ways each number can be rolled. For example, there is just one way to roll a 2 (1+1), but two ways to roll a 3 (2+1 and 1+2). As you can see, there are a total of 16 ways to win a Field bet in craps.

  • 2:  1:1
  • 3:  2:1; 1:2
  • 4:  2:2, 3:1, 1:3
  • 5:  3:2, 2:3, 4:1, 1:4
  • 6:  3:3, 4:2, 2:4; 5:1, 1:5
  • 7:  4:3, 3:4, 5:2, 2:5, 6:1, 1:6
  • 8:  4:4, 5:3, 3:5,6:2, 2:6
  • 9:  5:4, 4:5, 6:3, 3:6
  • 10: 5:5, 6:4, 4:6
  • 11: 6:5, 5:6
  • 12: 6:6

The Field bet has a house edge of around 5.6% for craps games where the 2 and the 12 both pay 2:1. It has a house edge of around 2.8% on craps games where the Field bets on either the 2 OR the 12 pay 3:1. This is often the case in casinos offering extra “bonuses” on The Field. The rest of the Field numbers usually pay 1:1 (“even money”).

Is The Field Bet A Good Bet In Craps?

The Field bet is a “Proposition” or “Prop” bet. These are usually one-roll wagers on events which are generally either difficult to make, or can be made more profitably in another way.

The Field bet is not the best bet in craps. With a house edge of around 5.6% on games where the 2 and the 12 pay 2:1 each, or a house edge of around 2.8% on games where either the 2 OR the 12 pay 3:1, these one-roll Prop bets can take a big bite out of your bankroll.

In comparison, the base-wager on the Pass Line, and the original base wager on the Come, both carry a lower house edge of around 1.4%. And so, at least statistically, these are far better bets to make.

Also, when betting the Pass Line – and after the point has been established – you can place Free Odds behind your Pass Line wagers. These Free Odds are now paid at True Odds, without any house edge.

This means that if you place just Single Odds behind your Pass Like wager, then the house edge on your bets is now only 0.85%. And if you place Double Odds behind your Pass Line wager, then the house edge against you is only 0.65%.

These are big differences when compared with the Field bets.

In most casinos, you can make even higher Free Odds than that, and this can significantly alter your craps betting strategy.

What Is The Best Craps Field Bet Strategy?

The generally-accepted advice – especially to novice craps players – is to stay away from all Prop bets, which includes betting the Field.

But just because the Field is not among the most statistically-friendly wagers, does not mean that it should always be avoided.

There are, after all, 16 ways to win on The Field – and this wager was originally intended to give the gambler a last one-roll chance to hit something – even if it was just enough for the bus ticket home.

So, what is the best craps field bet strategy?

It kind of depends on the game. If you’re in a game where the shooter – which is the person rolling the dice – is hitting a lot of numbers, and NOT a 7, then it’s a good strategy to back your other wagers with the occasional Field bet.

And that’s because even if the shooter rolls Craps – meaning a 2, or a 3 or a 12 – then the Field still wins, while the other bets, like the Come bet, will lose.

So, players sometime use the Field as a kind of back-up plan if they are already loaded up on all the box numbers, and are pushing their bets with riding Come bets at the same time. And perhaps also blocking some of the other Prop bets or any On The Hop bets on the table.  

The Iron Cross Craps Strategy

This is a kind of shoot-and-go-home one-roll Prop bet – like taking the Field as a last hurrah before going home.

You bet the Field in multiples of $5, then place the same multiples of $5 on the number 5, and then place multiples of $6 each on the 6 and the 8 (and NOT on the Big 6 or Big 8, which you DO NOT want to use, ever).

Because every number wins, except for any 7, this is a reasonable last-ditch effort to walk away with something. The house edge on the Iron Cross bet is about 1.15%. But that also depends on the various other odds and house payouts on the other bets, and that means that the actual percentages can, and do, vary. We’ll have more on the Iron Cross bet in craps on another occasion.

So for now, best of luck to all!

Lead image credit: Nic Neufeld/Shutterstock

]]>
When To Hit In Blackjack (And When Not To) https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/when-to-hit-in-blackjack/ Tue, 30 Apr 2024 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=39194 Taking a hit in blackjack means asking for another card from the dealer after your initial two. You should choose to hit when it’s likely that getting another card will improve your hand without going over 21. For example, you should hit when your total is less than 12, when you have a 12 or 13 against a dealer’s 2, when you have a low hand against a dealer’s pat hand, and when you have a higher soft hand against a dealer’s pat hand.

Read on for a play by play of when to hit in blackjack, and crucially, when not to.

When To Hit In Blackjack?

Below you’ll find a breakdown of the times you want to hit. You can also refer to our blackjack strategy charts, which tell you when to hit, stand, double down, split, or surrender for every possible hand.

1. Totals less than 12

If your hand doesn’t total at least 12, you need to hit until you have at least a hard total of 12. You can’t bust, so taking a hit doesn’t hurt you yet.

2. 12 or 13 against a dealer’s 2

The dealer 2 allows them to draw to some very good hands. If you have a 12 or a 13, you should hit to try and get a better hand, even though you may sometimes bust.

3. Low hands against a dealer’s pat hand

In blackjack, a low hand (total less than 17) is hit against a dealer’s pat hand (17 to 21).

One of the premises of blackjack is that the dealer will have a 10 under whatever card is turned up. A pat dealer hand then, is one where the dealer has a 7, 8, 9, 10 or ace turned up.

You should therefore assume that they have a total of 17 or more and won’t be drawing more cards (dealer’s generally have to stand on 17 or more).

This means you need to hit your hand, even if it means going over 21, to try and get to at least 17.?

4. Higher soft hands against a dealer’s pat hand

A soft hand is one with an ace that can be counted as a 1 or 11. It means drawing a card can’t break it.

You should always hit a soft 17 against a dealer’s pat hand, because even if you draw a high card, you aren’t at risk of busting.

The ace gives the hands flexibility: if your next card would cause the total to exceed 21, you count the ace as 1 instead of 11. So, you can aggressively pursue a stronger hand to beat the dealer’s pat hand.

You should even hit soft 18 against a 9, 10, or ace up card.

When Not To Hit In Blackjack

Sometimes, you need to just let the dealer see if they can bust. Other times, you may need to split or double down instead of taking a hit. And sometimes, you just have to know when you can’t draw anymore. Here are the times when you don’t want to take a hit.

1. When you should surrender instead

If surrender is allowed, you want to give up your 16 against a dealer’s 9, 10, or ace, in return for half your bet, unless you have a pair of 8s. In which case you split them.

You will surrender your 15 against a dealer’s 10 or ace.

2. A total of 17 or more

Once you reach a total of at least hard 17, you have done all that you can do. It’s time to step back and hope that Lady Luck is on your side, no matter what the dealer has for an up card.

3. Against a dealer’s bust card

If the dealer has a 2 through 6 up, and the odds are they have a high card underneath, then there is a good chance that they will have to draw and probably bust.

So, when a dealer has a 2 through 6 up, you will generally stay on any card that will bust you, meaning you stop at hard 12.

The one exception being hitting the 12 and 13 against a dealer 2, which we discussed earlier.

4. When you should split a pair

If you have a pair, then you may split them. You can get a breakdown of when to split pairs in our in-depth article, but the important things to remember are you always split aces and 8s, you split 4s if you are allowed to double split hands, and you never split 10s.

5. When you should double down

Read our article to understand when to double down in blackjack. But for now, remember that you can double down when your card totals 11, when you have a soft 16, 17 or 18, and when you have a hard 9 or 10.

When Does The Dealer Have To Hit In Blackjack?

In blackjack, the dealer will draw until they have at least 17. They will stand on 17 and above, and hit anything below that.

Some blackjack casinos will hit if the dealer has soft 17, others won’t. The rules vary based on the specific house rules of the casino. We prefer games where the dealer doesn’t hit on soft 17.

How To Signal Hitting In Blackjack

Signaling that you want to hit in blackjack is usually accomplished by lightly scratching next to your cards. In games where you hold the cards, you simply scratch the cards near your bet, making sure you don’t bend them.

FAQs About Hitting In Blackjack

Should I hit or stand on 16?

If the dealer has a 7 through ace up, you should hit your 16. If not, then you need to stand.

Do you hit a 13 against a 2?

2s are tricky. You need to hit both your 12 or 13 against a dealer 2.

Should I hit on 14?

Hit against a dealer’s pat hand of 7 through ace, and stand on a dealer’s breaking hand of 2 through 6.

Should you ever hit a 17?

You need to hit a soft 17, but you should never hit a hard 17.

Should you hit a 16 against a 10?

The simple answer is yes, you should hit a 16 against a 10, but this is one of those hands that is so close to going either way. The best thing you can do is surrender if allowed.

If you absolutely feel like you need to stand, I hereby absolve you. If you look around the layout and see a lot of small cards, then maybe you will be ok standing. But as a new player, it’s probably best to stay consistent and hit it.

]]>
How To Beat Baccarat: The Best Baccarat Strategies Revealed https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/baccarat-strategy/ Mon, 29 Apr 2024 08:45:32 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=39456 To win baccarat, you must use a baccarat strategy that can produce results when up against the power of the house edge. Merely following the advice to “always bet on Banker” is not a clever strategy. Beginners may stick to a flat-betting strategy, while more advanced players will adopt a pattern-based baccarat strategy with a staking system built into it.

Skip to:

Best Baccarat Strategy for Beginners

If you’re new to baccarat, I’d recommend starting with a simple strategy. When you gamble in live or online baccarat games, avoid complex or long sequences.

You can go with the Fibonacci strategy, or just stick to flat betting. Flat betting simply means staking the same amount of money in all games, whether you win or lose.

Because you bet the same amount on each hand when flat betting, you’ll be able to maintain a tight reign on your bankroll and minimize risk. It also allows for gradual learning; you can track your win/loss ratio and hone your skills of selecting more correct outcomes and fewer consecutive wrong outcomes.

Once you’ve mastered this strategy, you can begin to form a baccarat staking strategy. This is a strategy you develop that works for the average results you’re able to achieve.

Baccarat Staking Strategies

In 50:50 gambling games of chance, like baccarat, you face the following problems:

  • Trying to recover from losses
  • Trying to get ahead from breakeven
  • Trying to stay in front, when in front

It’s therefore more common to come across negative progression staking strategies, rather than flat-betting strategies.

Negative Progression Staking Strategy

A negative progression strategy is a betting system where you increase your bet after each loss, in the hope of recovering previous losses when you win. The Martingale strategy and the Fibonacci strategy are two well-known examples of this.

Certain negative progression strategies work well, but only when your gameplay can predict correct outcomes with high bet sizes.

So, the betting decisions you make:

  1. Need to turn out to be right in at least 33% of the outcomes you bet on, and…
  2. …with no more than three losses in a row before a win, on average.

The negative progression win/loss ratio will look something like this:

W-L-L-L-W-L-W-W-L-L-W-L-W-W-L-L-W-L-L-L

If you’re not going to follow a negative progression strategy to bet your way out of trouble while still trying to make a profit, you need to flat bet.

Flat Staking Strategy

If you flat bet to secure a profitable advantage, you need to turn out to be right in at least 55% of the outcomes you bet on in a baccarat shoe.

The more shoes you bet on in a baccarat gambling session, the higher your win rate needs to be, especially if you’re winning on Banker hands and the baccarat variant subjects you to 5% commission. Then I’d recommend a 65% win rate.

The flat betting win/loss ratio will look something like this:

L-W-W-W-L-L-W-L-W-L-W-W-L-W-W-W-L-W-W-W

When your baccarat gameplay doesn’t work out, it doesn’t really matter what strategy you use, because the result will fail to beat baccarat.

Next, let’s look at some popular baccarat betting strategies in more detail.

Martingale Betting Strategy

The Martingale betting system is well-known. You might’ve heard of it if you’ve been betting on other even-money casino games such as roulette or baccarat.

But even if the name doesn’t ring a bell, if you’ve ever chased your losses, you’ve used the Martingale to some extent.

This popular baccarat betting strategy involves doubling your wager after each loss, with the goal of recovering previous losses and making a small 1 unit profit. But the Martingale strategy isn’t as gold as some gamblers make it out to be.

What makes the Martingale betting strategy tick is the theory a player will eventually win a hand, thereby recovering all losses and making a small (1 unit) profit.

It doesn’t consider the 5% commission if the win occurred on Banker. If it did, depending on the bet size, this could even negate the 1 unit of profit sought!

Martingale Strategy Pros

  • Straightforward to understand.
  • Can lead to quick recovery of losses in theory.

Martingale Strategy Cons

  • Requires a large bankroll to sustain losses during a losing streak.
  • Risk of reaching the table maximum bet size limit or running out of money before a win.
  • Doesn’t consider the house edge, or 5% commission on Banker wins, which can lead to long-term losses.

Fibonacci Betting Strategy

The Fibonacci strategy is based on the Fibonacci Sequence, where each number is the sum of the two preceding numbers:

Example: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13

  • 1+1=2
  • 1+2=3
  • 2+3=5
  • 3+5=8
  • 5+8=13

Following the Fibonacci sequence in baccarat means you increase your bets after each loss (moving to the next number in the sequence), and decrease your bets after each win (moving back at least two in the sequence). You can decide which lower number to start the sequence again with. E.g. If you won on 13, you could start on 5 or 2.

Fibonacci Strategy Pros

  • Provides a more gradual increase in bets compared to the Martingale betting system.
  • Less aggressive and lower risk of large losses. Recommended for beginners just getting started.

Fibonacci Strategy Cons

  • Requires a moderate bankroll to withstand consecutive losses.
  • Winning streaks may not always make up for previous losses.

1-3-2-6 Betting Strategy

The 1-3-2-6 is a progressive baccarat betting strategy, where you increase your bet size in a certain order after each win:

  • 1 unit for the first win
  • 3 units for the second win
  • 2 units for the third win
  • 6 units for the fourth win

Following a loss, the sequence returns to 1.

1-3-2-6 Betting Strategy Pros

  • Structured approach with clear betting progression.
  • Limits losses during losing streaks.

1-3-2-6 Betting Strategy Cons

  • Requires a winning streak to be profitable, which may not be that simple for beginners or players who struggle to make the right calls (Banker or Player).
  • It’s harder to win on 3rd and 4th consecutive outcomes: 3-in-a-row and 4-in-a-row wins. Equally, it’s not easy to get single and double outcomes correct.
  • Doesn’t guarantee long-term success and may result in losses if the streak is interrupted by a loss.

Paroli Betting Strategy

This is often referred to as the “reverse Martingale” strategy. Here, you double your bets after each win to capitalize on winning streaks and maximize profits. The pros and cons are like the 1-3-2-6 system, but let’s go over them.

Paroli Betting Strategy Pros

  • Capitalizes on hot streaks and maximizes profits during winning streaks.
  • Limits losses during cold streaks by resetting the bet size after a loss.

Paroli Betting Strategy Cons

  • Relies on consecutive wins to be profitable.
  • Vulnerable to losing streaks that can quickly wipe out profits or reduce your bankroll.

Strategy For Predicting The Correct Banker Or Player Outcome

Ultimately, there isn’t one. If it were easy to always make the right call, there wouldn’t be so many gambling strategies telling gamblers to wager more in a losing streak. Good gambling strategies do not include a method for selecting whether to bet on Banker or Player hands in baccarat games.

There are only two hands in baccarat, but four possible outcome patterns, as follows:

  1. Streak of Banker outcomes
  2. Streak of Player outcomes
  3. Choppy streak of both hands
  4. Combination of a, b, and c, including short streaks and changing patterns

This combination of patterns makes it difficult to predict correct Banker or Player outcomes.

Below are some examples relating to the above patterns. Note: I believe a streak forms at a minimum of 3-in-a-row.

  • Banker pattern streaks: B-B-B-B-B
  • Player pattern streaks: P-P-P-P-P
  • Choppy streak: B-P-B-P-B-P
  • Short streaks: B-B-B / P-B-P / P-P-P
  • Changing patterns:   P-P / B-P / B-B / P-P-P / B-P-P / B-P-B / P-B / P-B-B   

A run of Player outcomes can be just as long as a run of Banker outcomes. And choppy runs can be long too.

In the game of baccarat, we know that the Banker hand has a slightly higher probability of occurring due to the baccarat drawing rules. However, over a limited number of shoes, Player outcomes could in fact dominate.

You might conclude that runs of Banker outcomes are more likely, but each shoe produces vastly different results, so don’t bank on it.

Baccarat House Edge And Baccarat Betting Strategies

It’s important to address the casino’s house edge in baccarat.

Whatever baccarat technique you end up using, you should bear in mind the forces that are working against you. These are built into the game and function in the background.

The house has the following edge on Banker and Player bets (based on an 8-deck shoe):

  • 1.06% for Banker
  • 1.24% for Player

It doesn’t really matter if the outcome results in a tie, because you won’t lose your stake.

The most common version of baccarat deducts a 5% commission from the winning portion of a winning Banker bet. So, if you bet $20 on Banker and win, you’ll receive $39 (consisting of your $20 stake + $19 total win amount).

Obviously the 5% commission takes more out of your winnings the higher your stake, even though the house edge remains the same. If you only (or mostly) bet on the Banker hand, you should factor in what you stand to lose over the long-run.

The Impact Of Commission On Baccarat Strategies

You have two hurdles to overcome when playing baccarat:

  1. Making the right call i.e. has the hand you bet on won the round?
  2. How badly is all that commission you’re paying affecting your baccarat bankroll?

The deducted 5% commission of 20 flat betting Banker wins is equivalent to one unit.

When you bet higher stakes and win on Banker, it costs you more. And you’re not going to win every Banker hand, even the ones you stake more on. This means that the house has you cornered.

Naturally, baccarat bettors are attracted to betting on Banker because of its lower house edge. The leading baccarat bet selection strategy (common amongst baccarat game authors) is to bet the Banker no matter what. But this is not a clever strategy.

And why not? Start out on the premise that:

  • You have a 50:50 chance of winning on Banker and Player
  • The outcomes of the average 8-deck shoe return 37x Bankers, 33x Players and 5x Ties
  • The outcomes occur within a combination of patterns, as explained above.

No hand gets ahead of the other by much at any stage of a shoe. Flat betting Banker all the way will result in you losing almost 2 units on commission!

Also, when you increase wagers, you run the risk of losing more on commission and/or losing more chips when Banker doesn’t hit.

Expert Tips For Trying To Win At Baccarat:

Whether you’re a baccarat beginner or have been playing the game for ages, the following baccarat tips should come in handy.

  • Bankroll management: Proper bankroll management is essential. Set loss limits and stick to them to avoid chasing losses and overspending.
  • Consistency: Stick to a consistent baccarat betting strategy and avoid making impulsive decisions based on gut feelings.
  • Discipline: Avoid chasing losses or deviating from your initial strategy. During both winning and losing streaks, stay focused and stick to your plan.

Baccarat Strategy Myths And Misunderstandings

A common misunderstanding about baccarat outcomes is the belief that the same patterns or trends will continue or end. Since baccarat is a game of chance, each hand is independent of the previous ones.

You may see a streak of Banker or Player outcomes, but each subsequent hand is statistically independent and unaffected by previous results. So, it’s difficult to win if betting on a certain pattern to form.

Nonetheless, identifiable reoccurring patterns do form. If you can ride the wave of a forming pattern, you could rack up some nice wins.

Baccarat Strategy Conclusion

When it comes to baccarat betting strategies, most of what you’ll come across online isn’t written by those with actual gambling experience. So, pay close attention to this baccarat strategy guide.

This guide is meant to be a learning curve for beginners. But it’s detailed enough to be read by seasoned baccarat gamblers.

Predicting outcomes and deciding how much you’re willing to stake on baccarat rounds isn’t easy. Trying to beat the game of baccarat is a journey of modifying bet selections and staking strategy techniques.

For more on baccarat, check out this article on baccarat side bets.

Lead image credit: Vectorportal.com, CC BY 4.0

]]>
The Best Craps Strategies, Simply Explained By An Expert https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/craps-strategy/ Thu, 25 Apr 2024 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=39349 In craps, like in any casino game, finding the best betting strategy is about three things: focusing on the wagers with the smallest house advantage, managing your bankroll wisely, and playing a style that optimizes your fun. In this article, we’ll take you through the best possible craps strategies step-by-step, so you can make the most of your time at the tables.

Skip to:

A Quick Odds Refresher

To understand which bets are the best in craps, you must master the great dice probability pyramid, which shows you how the different combinations result in the relative likelihood of each number coming up.

2:  1:1
3:  2:1; 1:2
4:  2:2, 3:1, 1:3
5:  3:2, 2:3, 4:1, 1:4
6:  3:3, 4:2, 2:4; 5:1, 1:5
7:  4:3, 3:4, 5:2, 2:5, 6:1, 1:6
8:  4:4, 5:3, 3:5,6:2, 2:6
9:  5:4, 4:5, 6:3, 3:6
10: 5:5, 6:4, 4:6
11: 6:5, 5:6
12: 6:6

Understanding this probability pyramid, along with what the casino pays you on a winning bet, is the key to deciding what the best craps bets are. You then need to combine them into the best possible betting strategies. Read more about the basics of craps here.

A Quick Craps Bets Refresher

The best craps strategy only requires knowledge of a limited number of bet types. Let’s do a quick review of the basic bets with the lowest house advantage:

1. Pass Line

The shooter makes come out rolls until a point is rolled (a 4,5,6,8,9, or 10). During come out rolls, your Pass Line bet wins (and pays even money) if the shooter hits a 7 or 11, and loses on a 2,3, or 12.

Once a point has been established, only two rolls matter; the Pass Line bet now wins if that point appears again, and loses on a 7.

Note how the odds shift against you. During the come out roll, there are 8 ways to win instantly (on 7 and 11) and only 4 ways to lose (2, 3 and 12).  But with a point established, you’re at a statistical disadvantage. If the point is 6 or 8, a Pass Line bet wins five times for every six times a 7 appears, making for a 45% win probability. A 5 or 9 have just a 40% win probability, and 4 or 10 have a dismal 33% chance.

2. Come

When the bettor wants to cheer for additional numbers, they can bet the Come. The rules for Come bets are almost identical to Pass Line bets, save for the timing of the bet. You can only place Come bets before point rolls. Once placed, they follow the same sequence and rules as a Pass Line bet.

3. Don’t Pass/Don’t Come

Betting the Don’t Pass and Don’t Come follow rules that are almost the mirror image of their right way counterparts. What wins for the right way loses for the wrong way and vice versa, with one exception: for the right way, a 12 represents a loss on come out rolls, but it’s only a push for wrong way players.

So, knowing all this, what’s the best way to play craps?

Strategy #1: Pass Line and Come Bet Craps Strategy

When there’s a hot shooter, you’ll hear the siren song of Place and Lay bets, which allow you to get multiple numbers up and running immediately. You might look longingly at the Props bets or the Field bet. Don’t do it!

Whether you’re betting with or against the shooter, bet the Pass Line during the come-out roll, back it with odds (see Strategy #2), and build numbers through Come bets. Only place bets with the smallest house advantage.

Craps table showing come bet area and pass line
Image credit: Matt Apps/Shutterstock

Strategy #2: Odds Bet Craps Strategy

Once a point is established, Pass Line or Come bets are underdogs. Remember the pyramid: 7 is always more likely to come up than the point. So how do we salvage these bets? With Odds bets.

Both land-based and online casinos let you reduce the house advantage by backing your Pass Line or Come bets with an additional Odds bet that’s a multiple (usually 2 or 3x) the original wager amount.

Why do this if you’re at a statistical disadvantage? Because the payout on Odds bets are made with no house advantage; that is, these wagers are offered at what is known as true odds.

Since 6 or 8 have five ways of appearing versus the 7’s six, the casino pays 6-to-5 on an odds bet backing a 6 or 8. Odds payoffs are in proportion to a point’s disadvantage versus a 7. Odds bets pay 3-to-2 on 5 and 9 and pay 2-to-1 on 4 and 10.

For example, you’ve got a Pass Line bet and the point is 4. The 4 can come only three ways (2-2, 3-1, and 1-3) versus the six ways a 7 can come up. Since the bet is twice as likely to lose as it is to win, true odds means the house pays you twice your wagered amount should it win.

Assuming 3x Odds betting is allowed, that means your Pass Line bet on 4 has gone from a 33% house advantage to a little north of 8%. That’s a significant improvement. It doesn’t make you more likely to win craps, it just means you get paid off better when you do win.

And that makes Odds bets always worth making.

Example: Basic Betting Sequence Using Strategy #1 and #2

Here’s a basic approach you can take that gives you exposure to two numbers at a time, assuming 3x odds are allowed.

  1. Buy in with at least 15x the minimum bet at the table. At a $10 table, you should buy in for at least $150 in chips. But remember to only ever bet what you can afford to lose.
  2. Bet a unit ($10) on the pass line. Replace it as necessary in the event of a 2,3, or 12 on the come-out.
  3. Once a point is established, back it with full odds and place another unit on the Come.
  4. Should the Come bet win, take your payout and place another unit on the Come.

This betting sequence will get you comfortable with placing odds bets and with monitoring two numbers at once.

When you play in the casino, Come bets can take some getting used to as the dealers physically move your chips from the Come bet area to the numbered square of the established point.

Once you get a feel for managing multiple numbers, and once you’ve experienced the joys of a long roll (along with the pain of a 7-out wiping out your bets), you can up your game.

Strategy #3: 6 8 Craps Strategy

Remember strategy #1 about sticking to the basic bets? There is one exception to this rule.

A Place bet lets you select a number and bet on it directly. Like your other bets, Place bets win when that number comes up and lose on a 7. They differ from a Come bet in that you skip the come out roll sequence and get a number of your choice working right away.

While Place bets on the 4,5,9, and 10 come with a big house advantage, the 6 and 8 Place bets actually have a reasonable house edge that’s only slightly worse than an equivalent Come bet (assuming 3x odds).

So strategy #3 is to accelerate your game play to get more numbers working at once, and to Place the 6 or 8 to get them up sooner.

Example: Intermediate Betting Sequence Using Strategy #3

Getting more numbers working exposes you to a bigger loss at one time, but it gives you more ways to win. And you’re positioned to rake in big money should a player go on a long roll without a 7-out.

  1. Buy in with at least 20x the minimum bet at the table.
  2. Bet a unit on the Pass Line; take full odds when a point is established.
  3. If your point is a 4, 5, 9, or 10, bet a two(-ish)* unit Place bet on either the 6 or 8
  4. Bet a single unit Come bet and back it with full odds.
  5. Maintain three numbers at once using the Come and Place bets to replace a winner.

The goal of this strategy is two-fold: to get three numbers working as soon as possible, and to make sure one of those numbers is the 6 or 8. This is why it’s known as the 6 8 craps strategy.

*The 6/8 Place bet pays out at 7-to-6, so bet it in increments of $6. At a $10 minimum game, that means $18 or $24 works. (You can bet in any increment you want, but the goal is to make it easy for the casino to pay you off.) When in doubt, ask the dealer; they’ll let you know if the amount you’ve bet needs adjusting.

Once you’re comfortable with craps strategy #3, you can see how it could be easily expanded by using Place bets to always maintain both the 6 and 8, while using the Come bet to build on the other numbers. It’s not unheard of for experienced players to have 4, 5, or all 6 numbers to be working at once through a combination of Pass Line, Come, and Place bets.

Strategy #4: Don’t Come And Don’t Pass Craps Strategy

Overall, betting against the dice is actually slightly more advantageous than betting with them.

There’s also a gameplay advantage with Don’t bets. For one thing, with multiple numbers up, a 7-out turns into a big payday as all your Pass and Come bets get paid off at once. On the other hand, when the shooter hits a point, you’ll only lose one bet at a time; there’s no way to get completely wiped in the manner of 7 taking down all active numbers for a right way bettor.

So why not bet the Don’t Pass and Don’t Come every time? Well, there’s a non-monetary cost to being a wrong-way bettor in a live game. Craps is a social game and most people at the table are betting with the dice.

That means there’s cheering and backslapping and camaraderie when the shooter hits points, or even simply has a long roll.

If you approach a craps table full of right-way players and plunk down a big bet on the Don’t Pass, you’ll quickly become the least popular person at the table, because you’re hoping for a sequence of dice throws that simultaneously rips their hearts out and fattens your wallet.

Example: Advanced Betting Sequence Using Strategy #4

So, you’ve decided to join the dark side. Congratulations, as you’re going to be making bets with the lowest house advantage on the table, making it arguably the best mathematical craps strategy.

  1. Buy in with at least 20x the minimum bet at the table.
  2. Bet a unit on the Don’t Pass Line; lay* full odds when a point is established.
  3. Bet a unit on Don’t Come and lay full odds until you have three numbers working.
  4. Should the shooter hit a point and take down one of your working numbers, replace it. But only do this twice. Yes, this is more about emotion than rationality, but if a shooter starts hitting points, it can feel like the start of a long roll. Rather than fighting the tide, sometimes it’s best to accept your fate. Once you’ve replaced two points, let the roll play out until your bets win with a 7-out. If all your numbers get knocked down, sit out until the next shooter.

*When you bet the wrong way, you don’t place Odds bets like you would for Pass Line and Come bets. These are true odds payouts, which means you back your bet by laying odds. The math is the exact inverse of placing odds on right way bets. On a 6/8, you’re laying increments of $6, which will pay $5 on a win. On 5/9 you’re laying an easy multiple of 3 that will get paid out at 2-to-3. And on 4/10, you can lay any even number as the bet will get paid off at 1-to-2.

Craps Playing Strategies Conclusion

When it comes to the best craps strategy, keep one simple rule of thumb in mind. No bet-sizing or sequencing combination can overcome a house advantage, no matter how small it is. So, your goal in craps is to bet in ways the minimizes house advantage while maximizing your fun, and in such a way that suits your style of play.

Enjoyed this? Check out our article on craps dice control.

Lead image credit: ThoroughlyReviewed/Flickr, CC BY 2.0

]]>
Everything You Need To Know About Arbitrage Betting To Guarantee A Profit https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/arbitrage-betting/ Thu, 18 Apr 2024 11:31:26 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=27394 Arbitrage betting, or ‘arbing’ for short, is where you place bets on all possible outcomes of a sporting event. If done correctly, arbitrage betting guarantees you a profit.

Here, you can learn all about arb betting, what it is, how it works, whether it’s legal or not, and the risks involved.

What Is Arbitrage Betting?

Arbing is where you back and lay the same outcome on a sports event, exploiting any mathematical differences in the odds available. The margin between these is called an ‘arb’.

If done correctly, arbitrage betting guarantees you a profit regardless of whether the back or lay wager wins.

When arbitrage betting, the back wager must be at higher odds than the lay.

You don’t even have to be knowledgeable about sports in order to become a successful arber. It’s all about finding opportunities.

Bay and lay bets explained

The wager where you back a sporting outcome should be placed via a regular fixed-odds bookmaker, either online through sportsbooks or offline at retail outlets.

When putting on the lay bet while arbing, however, you can only make this via a sports betting exchange.

How Arbitrage Betting Works

We’ve included some practical examples of arbitrage betting to help illustrate how it works.

In a hypothetical horse race in the UK, Red Rum is the 9/4 (3.25 in decimal odds) favorite with the bookmakers to win. That works out as £9 in profit for every £4 gambled.

On the exchanges, meanwhile, this horse can be laid at 15/8 (2.88), which means £15 profit for every £8 wagered.

Arb betting example in horse racing

You will probably have to pay commission on the lay wager when arbing. This is typically 2%, so also factor this into your calculations.

Backing Red Rum when betting £100 through a fixed odds bookmaker then requires a lay stake of £113.64.

Your exchange betting balance will need to be £213.64, to cover paying out to whoever matches you in the event he wins the race.

An arbing calculator helps you figure out how much you need to bet in order to guarantee profit. These are readily available online.

Should the back bet win, you make £225 of profit on that, minus the £213.64 of losses from the exchanges.

If the lay wager is successful, then there is £227.28 in winnings, with the 2% commission to pay and losing fixed-odds bookmaker bet to deduct.

Either way, you make £11.36 of profit whether Red Rum wins the race or not. It’s all thanks to arbitrage betting done properly.

That isn’t a massive margin on its own, but, if done several times a day, what you stand to gain soon adds up.

Another Arb Betting Example

Let’s now look at a football example of arbitrage betting. New England Patriots are at Tampa Bay Buccaneers in the NFL.

You back the Patriots at +175 for the win on the road with the bookmaker, staking $50. For every $4 bet, you receive $7 in profit.

At the same time, you can lay New England to lose at Tampa Bay at +163 on the exchanges. For every $8 gambled, there are $13 in winnings if successful.

Again, with 2% commission to pay on your exchange wager, a lay stake of $52.68, making sure your balance is $85.87 to cover the loss, would be enough to guarantee $1.63 in profit either way through arb betting.

Just remember, you must subtract the losing wager – either the back or lay part of arbing – from your winnings.

If the back bet is successful, there is also commission costs to pay, as well as settling the losing exchange wager with whoever matched your bet.

Arbing Is Legal But Risky

Person trying to access account that has been blocked

There are no laws against arbitrage betting, so you can’t be prosecuted for doing it.

However, be aware that bookmakers do not take kindly to arb bettors.

This is because you are profiting from a pastime that is supposed to incur losses.

Any bettor who wins often, through fixed-odds wagers and/or sports exchange betting, has their gambling activities monitored by the bookmaker. If you’re caught arbing, then there will be consequences.

It’s important that you are aware of the risks involved.

Bettors can have their accounts with bookmakers restricted, such as limited maximum stakes, or even closed.

Arbitrage betting may even lead to you being blacklisted, so you can never bet on some sportsbooks again.

For some experienced bettors, the irony of bookies being upset by arbing isn’t lost on them. Successful gambling is all about placing wagers when the odds are in your favor.

Bookmakers and their traders are usually pretty good and sharp at shutting down value, especially when reacting to market support for certain outcomes.

Avoiding detection and being exposed as an arber is part of the process, so we’ve got some tips later on that can help you with your arbitrage betting.

Popular Arbitrage Betting Events

Arbing is something you can do on any sport of your choice, but be warned.

The more niche or obscure the event that you back and lay outcomes on, then the more it will stand out to the bookmaker.

It makes more sense, then, if you keep arbitrage betting to popular gambling sports, such as soccer and horse racing.

These two sports in particular attract huge volumes of bets worldwide.

With soccer, there are so many different markets offered by fixed-odds sportsbooks, that traders may find it challenging to keep on top of the odds.

On the downside, the margins of guaranteed profit through arbitrage betting are pretty small here. This is because in many markets, there are only two or three possible outcomes.

Arbitrage betting is associated with horse racing more than any other sport, because of the multiple runners in races leading to a much wider variety of potential results.

Price fluctuations of the odds for horses is also a lot more common.

That naturally lends itself to arbing, especially if there are significant market moves that happen in the build-up to a race.

In order to help spot opportunities for arbitrage betting, there is software available to assist you.

Various providers have simple tools that crawl both fixed-odds sportsbooks and the betting exchanges, which identify where arbing is possible.

These are completely safe and legal to use.

Tips For Successful Arbitrage Betting

As promised, we’ve got some helpful hints and advice for any budding arbers out there.

Just follow these tips when doing arbitrage betting and you’ll beat the bookies at their own game!

Person placing bets at betting shop

1. Place Your Back Arbing Wagers In Betting Shops

Offline retail betting may not be as quick or convenient as online gambling, but placing wagers over the counter gives you a certain anonymity.

While you can’t do lay arbing in a betting shop, there is nothing stopping you from putting the back bet on in person.

It makes it much more difficult for the bookies to track you down.

A key thing to remember with arbitrage betting that uses shop arbing (or ‘sharbing’ for short) is to keep your accounts separate.

Do not link your online accounts to retail.

If you link them, it’s much easier for bookmakers to see what you’re up to.

2. Avoid Large Stakes – They Look Suspicious

Arb betting can involve significant sums of money, both across the back and lay wagers, in order to make decent margins.

The trouble with that is, the bigger your stakes are, the more they will stand out to the bookies, especially if you normally bet on a smaller scale.

Everyone wants a big profit from their gambling, but with arbing, you have to tread very carefully.

Little and often can also be flagged up, yet requires more investigation from bookmakers.

If you find an arbitrage betting opportunity on a major event like a soccer cup final or Group/Grade 1 horse race, where the volume of wagers will be high, that may be a better place to take a bigger punt than usual.

3. Use Multiple Betting Accounts

Use Multiple Betting Accounts - arb betting tips

If you always bet with the same bookmaker, then it won’t be difficult for them to see if you’ve been arbing or not.

Staying loyal to the same sportsbook only gives you access to a small portion of the market.

Arbitrage betting is about getting best odds possible for the back bet, so to do that you may need to wager with other sportsbooks.

Holding multiple accounts across different firms will make it even tougher for your bookmakers to know whether you are arb betting.

Like betting in person over the counter, this helps to obscure your activities.

4. Look Like A Mug Punter

One sure-fire way to cover your tracks from any arbing is to place mug bets.

That means deliberately lose some of the profits you’ve made through arbitrage betting.

Back your favorite soccer team or short-price favorites in horse races as an accumulator.

Make these losses discreet and subtle, so that you aren’t throwing too much away and bookmakers never suspect what you’re really up to.

The idea is to look like a mug – a na?ve, inexperienced bettor reinvesting some of your winnings on wagers that don’t pay off.

When the bookies come to profile you, these losses will show up and confuse the situation. That way, your arb betting may go on for much longer undetected.

Final Thoughts On Arbitrage Betting

Arbitrage betting is a win-win situation for bettors until you’re rumbled by bookmakers.

You may then face sanctions, including account closure, so you must be prepared for the consequences of discovery.

The key to successful arbitrage betting is locating margins between backing and laying the same outcome in a sports event.

It’s completely legal to do so, but annoys the bookies.

Software can help you with arbitrage betting and, although the margins may be modest, the lure of guaranteed profits is very attractive.

For more helpful guides, check out our post on prop betting.

]]>
What Is A Straddle In Poker & When Shouldn’t You Do It? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/what-is-a-straddle-in-poker/ Mon, 15 Apr 2024 09:43:03 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=39158 A straddle in poker means voluntarily paying an extra blind, or in other words, doubling the bet before anyone has seen their cards. This article will teach you exactly what this means, as well as when you should and shouldn’t do it. For example, you should avoid straddling when short-stacked, but consider it when button straddling is allowed.

Straddling in poker can be overwhelming for beginners. But after reading, you should not only understand the basic mechanics, but the best opportunities.

What Is A Straddle In Poker?

In poker, a straddle is akin to paying an extra big blind.

If this already sounds confusing to you and makes your eyes glaze over, don’t panic—you’re not alone. A poker term that often trips up beginners is “blinds.” So stay with me, as just for a moment, we do need to get technical.

In Texas Hold ‘Em, there is always a “button” placed at the table (see below). This is a physical button. The two players to the left of the button are called the blinds. The first person to the left of the button is the small blind; the person to the left of them is the big blind. If you’re playing $1/$2 stakes for example, the small blind will have to pay $1 and the big blind will have to pay $2.

Diagram showing positions at the poker table

Paying the blinds is mandatory—it’s actually a shorthand term for “blind bet.” Because you have to pay this amount before you’ve seen your cards. In other words, you have to pay it blindly.

(Bonus technical language if you want to get really precise: This is why players start with a raise preflop rather than a bet. The blinds were already a placed bet, so, for example, you can’t bet $10 but you can raise to $10).

A straddle means voluntarily paying an extra blind.

How Do Straddles Work In Poker?

In the example of the $1/$2 game, the small blind is $1, the big blind is $2, and you can straddle to $4—all without seeing your cards. Again, it functions like an extra big blind because you’ve put in this money blindly before seeing your cards.

People can even “double straddle” at certain casinos. This would mean the small blind pays $1, the big blind pays $2, the straddle pays $4, and the double straddle pays $8.

What would a super-ultra-rare triple straddle look like in this example? The triple straddle player would pay $16.

Straddling in poker is doubling the last bet before anyone has seen their cards. If the stakes were $5/$10, the player straddling would pay $20 prior to being dealt their hand. You need to declare your intention to straddle in advance.

Pro tip: If you choose to straddle, point to those extra chips so the dealer notices. They will then announce, “STRADDLE!” to the table so everyone knows that you placed your straddle before seeing your hand.

Once a player has straddled, that is now the minimum price to continue playing. Instead of it costing a minimum of $2 to keep playing, it is now $4 (or whatever the amount straddled to is). Straddling in poker is a way of raising the stakes.

Who Can Straddle In Poker?

First of all, it is important to mention that every casino is different and will have their own rules and regulations. Some venues will not allow straddling at all. The same applies when playing online poker.

Most commonly, however, you can choose to straddle when you are seated under-the-gun. That means you are the first person to act preflop. This is why in the previous section we indicated the person left of the big blind—that is the under-the-gun seat. If a casino allows straddles, you can always elect to straddle when you are here.

From time to time you will encounter a casino that also permits button straddles (a.k.a a ‘Mississippi straddle’). This means you can straddle when you are located on the button seat as well.

What if both the under-the-gun player and the button player want to straddle?

It is up to the casino who takes priority—don’t hesitate to ask. Good questions to ask when you’re new to a card room are:

  1. Do you allow straddles here?
  2. Can you straddle on the button or only under-the-gun?
  3. Does the under-the-gun straddle or the button straddle get priority?

In rare scenarios, you will find a game where you can straddle from any position at the table. In any case, the action usually starts left of the last straddle preflop. If the under-the-gun player straddled, the person to their left will have the first decision preflop whether to fold or play their hand. If the button player straddled, the person in the small blind will have the first decision.

There are definitely exceptions to button straddles, so it’s always good to clarify with the dealer.

What you need to know is this:

  • Most places allow under-the-gun straddles.
  • When you straddle under-the-gun, the action preflop starts on the player to your left (under-the-gun + 1).

Why Straddle In Poker: Pros And Cons

Now that we know what a straddle in poker is and who can straddle in Texas Hold‘Em, we need to answer the burning question: WHY straddle in poker?

There are reasons both for and against straddling in Texas Hold‘Em:

Pros

  • Straddling in poker raises the stakes. It now costs double to continue playing—and raises will be adjusted even bigger accordingly.
  • Poker is a people game—you want to create a fun atmosphere. People that don’t straddle are often viewed as uptight. Even though you might lose money straddling when you are dealt lousy cards, it can be worth it because it encourages everyone at the table to play looser and more relaxed. Think of it like buying a cocktail.
  • When the player(s) in the blinds are fish, it’s good to straddle when you are under-the-gun because you will play bigger pots while having direct position on them.
  • When you straddle under-the-gun, you no longer act first preflop. It is an advantage to see what everyone else does and then get to make your decision.

Cons

  • You waste chips every time you straddle and aren’t dealt a good hand.
  • Straddling in poker raises the stakes—which can also be a negative. The game might play bigger now than you can afford. Even if finances aren’t an issue for you, everyone’s stack depth gets cut in half.

    For example, in a $1/$2 game where everyone starts with $100, all players have 50 big blinds. If the game is straddled to $4, now everyone only has 25 big blinds. This means players will be all-in much more frequently and the game will play higher variance. Luck will play an outsized role.

When You Should And Shouldn’t Straddle In Poker

For the reasons above, you should avoid straddling when short-stacked (or most players at the table are short-stacked). All you are doing is minimizing your skill edge by making the game wilder and more swingy.

There is also a big difference between a button straddle and an under-the-gun straddle. When you straddle under-the-gun, you are making the pots play bigger when you are in a relatively bad position at the table. When you button straddle, however, you are putting more money in the middle when you have an advantage (because you get to act last after the flop and will get to see what all the other players do ahead of you. You will have more information to make your decisions). Button straddling is the most powerful option in Hold ‘Em.

A button straddle is considered such a huge advantage that many casinos do not permit it. It is too great of an edge. High stakes players don’t like it because it “kills the game” since poker pros can manipulate button straddles so effectively.

Under-the-gun straddles don’t provide that same advantage. The times they do are when fishy players are seated in the blinds, in which case that can sway you towards a straddle. Otherwise under-the-gun straddles are best avoided unless most players at the table are deep-stacked.

Can You Straddle In A Poker Tournament?

Finally you may wonder if you can straddle in a poker tournament. This one has an easy answer… no!

The poker chips you lose in tournaments are more valuable than the chips you gain. You can’t afford to be splashy and throw on a straddle to bump up the stakes. Even if you’re chip leader, you won’t be permitted to straddle in a poker tournament anyways!

Lead image credit: Poker Photos/Flickr, CC BY 2.0

]]>
Blackjack House Edge: How To Beat The Odds https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/blackjack-house-edge/ Tue, 02 Apr 2024 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=38652 The blackjack house edge is between 0.5% and 2%. While this house edge is quite low compared to many other casino games, it is still important to be aware of it and understand how to reduce it.

In this article, I explain how the blackjack casino advantage works, what you can expect in different types of blackjack games, and how to turn the odds in your favor.

The Math: How House Edge Works

House edge or house advantage is the mathematical advantage the casino retains over players in a gambling game.

Roulette is perhaps the simplest game to explain how the house edge works. On a European roulette wheel, there is a total of 37 numbers. Yet, if you make a straight bet and win, you will get paid 35:1. Your $1 bet will turn into $36 instead of $37.

This seemingly tiny difference creates a house edge of exactly 2.7%, which can add up pretty fast, depending on the size of your overall bet.

The advantage in blackjack is a bit more complicated to explain since it changes based on the player’s action and strategy. Plus, there are different blackjack variants you can play, and each of those comes with a different theoretical blackjack house advantage.

However, when all the rules and options in blackjack are considered, the casino will retain a small edge over the player, which can only be negated by card-counting techniques in some cases.

What Is House Edge In Blackjack?

The house edge in blackjack is anywhere between 0.5% and 2%, depending on which blackjack table you sit down at and how well you apply basic strategy.

If you were to play blackjack very badly, the casino could have an even higher advantage over you, but there is no reason to allow that to happen.

By applying basic strategy and optimally playing every hand, you can bring the house edge down to 0.5%.

But, before you think about the blackjack strategy you’ll apply, it’s critical to sit down at the right blackjack table where the house rules work in your favor.

Picking The Right Blackjack Table: Elements That Change House Edge

From the very beginning, the casino gains an edge by having you go first and possibly bust your hand before the dealer even flips over their cards.

However, the dealer must also obey a certain set of rules when playing their hand, which can work in the player’s favor.

These are the elements that you should look out for when picking your blackjack table in order to give yourself the best possible odds.

1. Number of Decks

The more decks that are used to deal hands, the higher the house edge. The likelihood of making a Blackjack is highest when just one deck is used. For example, 8-deck blackjack house edge can be up to 0.25% higher than a single-deck blackjack game.

2. The Soft 17 Rule

Another rule that can work against you is the dealer hitting on soft 17. While it might seem counterintuitive, the dealer having to hit on soft 17 gives the house another 0.2% edge over the player.

3. Double After Split

Another thing that can impact the house edge in blackjack is your ability to Double after Splitting. Being able to double after splitting will allow you to make bigger bets with strong hands. This way, you can reduce the house edge by approximately 0.15%.

4. Double Down on Any Total

Many blackjack games only allow you to double down with 10 or 11. In other casinos, you may be able to double down on any total. If you can double down on any total and know when to do it, you can take away about 0.2% of the house edge.

5. Multiple Splits

Another way you can negate house edge is by playing games that allow you to split your hand multiple times. Splitting a pair of Aces is great, but re-splitting when another Ace comes off is even better. You can take off some 0.05% of the house edge by being able to re-split.

6. Early and Late Surrender

Having the option to surrender early (before the dealer checks for Blackjack) is another advantage you should look for. Playing in a game with early surrender will help you reduce the house advantage a bit more.

7. 3:2 vs 6:5 Blackjack

One final thing that casinos do to tweak the house edge is paying you 6:5 for a Blackjack instead of 3:2. You should always play in a 3:2 game instead of 6:5 if you have any option, as this will directly win you more money every time you make a Blackjack.

Blackjack table

Overall, you want to look for games that are played with fewer decks, allow you to re-split your hands and double down after splitting, offer early surrender, and force the dealer to stand on soft 17. You should also always play 3 to 2 blackjack if possible.

Expert Tips: Strategies To Combat Blackjack’s House Edge

Now that you know what house edge is and how it works in blackjack, I’m going to give you a few additional tips that will help bring down the blackjack house advantage and improve your winning odds every time you play.

Expert Tip #1 – Sit at the Right Table

The most important thing of all when playing blackjack is that you are playing with favorable table rules.

Take some time to find games that will allow you to re-split, double down after splitting, and surrender before the dealer looks for Blackjack.

These little details may not seem that important, but will add up over time.

Expert Tip #2 – Never Deviate from Basic Strategy

If you want to enjoy the best possible returns and the lowest possible house edge in blackjack, you will need to play perfectly.

Fortunately, blackjack is a completely solved game, which means you don’t need to do much to play perfect strategy.

All you need to do is study basic blackjack strategy charts and stick to them in all situations and without any deviations. Do this, and the house edge will be minimized to begin with.

Expert Tip #3 – Learn How to Count Cards

Card counting is only possible in live casinos and only in some cases. However, it can give you a massive advantage that no other strategy can.

If you can find the right game and count cards in it, you may be as much as 2% or 3% favorite against the house, and that’s a massive advantage.

Learning to count cards is also fun, so study the techniques away from the table, wait for the right spot to apply them, and beat the house at their own game.

House Edge Across Blackjack Variations

There are many different versions of blackjack that you can play in live and online casinos worldwide.

Different versions of blackjack come with different rule sets, and this impacts the house edge.

Of course, you should always look for the game with the lowest house edge possible. Here’s a quick look at the payouts and house edge in some popular blackjack variations:

Blackjack VersionBlackjack PayoutHouse Edge
European Blackjack3:20.39%
American Blackjack3:20.61%
Blackjack Switch1:10.58%
Video Blackjack3:20.5% to 2%
Live Dealer Blackjack3:20.49% to 0.72%
Free Bet Blackjack3:21%
Face Up 211:10.85%

Note that all of these house advantage percentages only apply if you play the basic strategy to perfection and don’t make unnecessary deviations from optimal play!

Does Counting Cards Give You An Edge Over The House?

While it’s true that the casino always has an advantage over players, this is only true if the game is played without any extra help. Blackjack house edge and card counting are closely connected.

By applying the card counting techniques that the likes of the MIT team did back in the day, you can turn the house edge in your favor.

This is especially true if the game you are playing already has favorable rules and is being played with just one or two decks.

In this case, counting cards and understanding when you have the highest chances to make Blackjack will give you an advantage over the casino and allow you to place your big bets when the odds are in your favor.

Card counting only works in live casinos and is only possible if the shoe does not contain too many decks that are often shuffled, which can be problematic these days.

Yet, if you can find a casino that does not pay attention to such details, you may be able to play blackjack profitably and win big at this game of chance.

House Edge in Blackjack vs Other Games

I have compared the different versions of blackjack and shown you that the house advantage can be as low as 0.39% and as high as 2%, depending on table rules.

But how does this compare to other gambling games, and is blackjack the best game to play in a casino? Here is a quick rundown of house edge in different casino games for reference.

  • Blackjack house edge: 0.39% to 2%
  • Spanish 21 house edge: 0.4% to 0.76%
  • Baccarat house edge: 1.06% to 1.24%
  • Craps house edge: 1.58%
  • Ultimate Texas Hold’em house edge: 2.19%
  • Three Card Poker house edge: 3.37%
  • Roulette house edge: 1.3% to 5.26%
  • Sic Bo house edge: 8%

As you can see, blackjack is one of the most favorable casino games you will find, even compared to games like craps and baccarat, which are traditionally considered to have a low house edge.

Master House Edge for a Successful Blackjack Game

Blackjack is a fun game to play, and if you play it right, you’ll always be very close to breaking even against the house.

If you’re playing in a live casino, the cost of the drinks you get for free at the table may very well cover the entire amount of your theoretical loss in any session.

Keep in mind that different blackjack rules can impact the blackjack house advantage, so make sure you always play at the best tables available.

Also remember that there is a lot of variance in gambling, including blackjack, and that some nights will go your way, and others simply won’t.

As long as you remember you are at the table to have a good time, and are able to quit when losing without chasing your losses, blackjack is one of the best games to enjoy in a casino.

]]>
How To Win At Craps: The Best Craps Bets You Can Place https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/best-craps-bets/ Tue, 12 Mar 2024 10:40:38 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=38861 The Best Craps Bets: What You Need to Know
  • The “Pass Line” Bet is one of the simplest and most popular wagers in craps games in casinos, offering a low house edge and the best odds in craps.
  • The “Come” Bet is another common wager that works like the Pass Line bet but can be made any time after the point has been established.
  • “Don’t Pass” and “Don’t Come” Bets offer similar low house edges, but win when the shooter fails to make their point.
  • The “Place 6” and “Place 8” Bets allow players to pick these specific numbers, having some of the lowest house advantages in the game.
  • “Free Odds” Bets are additional wagers behind the pass line, don’t pass line, come, or don’t come bets, they have no house edge and can significantly increase potential payouts.

Your chances of winning at an online craps game largely depend on the types of bets you make. Happily, craps has some of the very best bets in the casino. Combine that with a good casino promotion and you can make some real bank.

Smart players using an optimal craps strategy rely on the Don’t Pass and Don’t Come bets. With a house edge of only 1.36%, these are the best craps bets you can make.

Sadly, there are far more rotten bets in craps – dozens of them. Bets with a house edge of between 5% (like the Field bet) to the high teens. Aside from a stroke of luck from the gods of chance, no one survives craps making these horrible bets very often.

The Best Craps Bets

If you watch a game of craps, you will note that just about every player makes more than one craps bet. Indeed, three or four or even more bets are thrown onto the table by fevered craps players. Such betting is the equivalent of putting one’s head in a noose and jumping off a balcony. The results will usually be deadly.

I’ve got good news and bad news here. The good news is that the good craps bets are indeed good. The bad news is that all the other craps bets are bad, very bad, and even worse than that. Do not make a bad bet if you want to win at craps. Easy advice to hear; hard advice for craps players to follow for some reason.

Best Craps BetsHouse Edge   Loss Per $100 Wagered
Don’t Pass1.36 %  $1.36
Don’t Come1.36 %  $1.36

Tip: On the Don’t Pass and the Don’t Come, you are betting against the point or the number and for the 7 during the the game.

Best Craps BetsHouse EdgeLoss Per $100 Wagered
Pass Line1.41 %$1.41
Come Bet1.41 %$1.41
Place the 6 for $61.52 %$1.52
Place the 6 for $61.52 %$1.52

Tip: On these four bets, you are betting with the point or with the 6 and/or the 8 against the 7.

Please note that I have made the losses out of $100 wagered. A $10 wager will be losses that are one tenth the amount. Also note that you do not lose in steady increments. You’ll win some bets, lose some bets, and so on, but in the course of your craps affairs, this is what the math says you can expect to be down betting this way. Betting “place bets” on the 6 and or 8 is usually done in increments of $6.

image for best craps bet

Image Credit: Shutterstock AI

The Optimal Craps Strategy: Make “Odds Bets”

Now, one of the best bets in craps that the casinos allow you to make once you have a Pass Line or Don’t Pass wager on the board. This option is called “odds.” It can also be used on the Come and Don’t Come bets when they are on a number. It is a vitally good bet and a great part of an optimal craps strategy.

The Pass and the Come players are betting with the shooter to hit anything but a 7. A winning wager is paid at even money. Of course, when you put that Pass bet up or Come bet up, you can win even-money when 7 or 11 hits (you lose if a 2, 3 or 12 rolls). You have four more ways to win than you have to lose when you wager like this.

Once these bets are on numbers, then the odds shift in favor of the casino. However, the casino will allow you to put more money into the game using a bet called the odds.

This bet has no house edge whatsoever.

How To Place Your Odds Bet

On the Pass Line, you put your craps odds bet behind your Pass bet; on the Come bet, you place the odds on the layout and the dealer will put that money on your Come bet.

The odds bet will pay the exact correct odds of a bet. If you put odds behind a point of 4, a win will pay off those odds at two to one. On a 10, it is also two to one, on the 6 or 8, the odds will pay $6 to $5 and on the 5 or 9, the odds will pay three to two.

Tip: These odds are based on how often the number hits in relation to how often a 7 will hit.

On the Don’t Pass or Don’t Come, the odds are figured based on how often the 7 rolls. So, for a 4 or 10, you put up twice as much money because the 7 will come up six times to the three times either a 4 or a 10 shows. Same with the other numbers. This means you have the long-end of the bet – in short, you bet more to win less.

The best way to handle these “right” bets is to have as much as you can in a craps odds bet and a smaller bet on the Pass or Come portion of the bet.

Odds bets can usually come in 2X (two times odds) to 3X, 4X, 5X, 10X or higher.

Okay, you now know the very best bets in craps. That’s right. The above bets are it. All the other craps bets are not worth making.

Title Image Credit: Juan Roballo/Shutterstock

]]>
What Is A Soft 17 In Blackjack & How Should You Play It? https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/soft-17-in-blackjack/ Mon, 11 Mar 2024 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.abouttanzanitejewelry.com/blog/?p=38715 A Soft 17 is a hand that totals 17 and contains an ace that can be counted as a 1 or 11. Crucially, you cannot bust if you take one more card. Ace-6 is a common example of a Soft 17. Learn more about this below, including how you should play it and what the dealer rules are.

What Is A Soft Hand In Blackjack?

Aces have a special role in blackjack because they can be valued at 1 or 11. A hand with an ace is known as a soft hand because of the flexible nature of aces. Let’s look at an example.

Soft hand with an Ace and an Eight

With Ace-8, this hand is a 19 (11 for the Ace + 8 for the Eight). While it’s a strong hand, the Ace gives you flexibility; you could take a hit with absolutely no risk of busting. (Why add a card to a 19? If the dealer showed a 5, a good aggressive option is to double down.)

TIP:  When your hand is compared to the dealer’s hand at the end of the game (the showdown) – all that matters is the numerical value of the two hands. Whether it’s a soft 19 or hard 19 has no bearing on determining whether you won or lost.

Let’s look at another example. In this case, the hand is Ace-2, making a Soft 13 (11 + 2). Some dealers might declare that this hand is “either 3 or 13”.

Soft 13 blackjack hand with an Ace and a Two

There are no circumstances where you’d want to stand on a Soft 13. That’s true even if the dealer is showing a bust card (2 through 6). You’d always want to take a risk-free hit to try and improve your 13.

But if this hand was a Hard 13 instead of a Soft 13, the strategy changes. If you were to take a hit on a Hard 13, you’re quite likely to draw a big card and bust. Against a dealer’s 5, for example, the best play on Hard 13 would be to stand on your (very weak) 13 and hope the dealer busts. 

What Is A Soft 17 In Blackjack?

Now we get to the hand in question: Soft 17. As mentioned, a Soft 17 is a soft hand that totals 17 and contains an ace that can be counted as a 1 or an 11. You cannot bust if you take one more card. Ace-6 is a common example of a Soft 17.

A soft 17 in blackjack

Soft 17 vs Hard 17 In Blackjack

While a Soft 17 hand contains an ace that can be counted as either 1 or 11 to prevent you from busting, a Hard 17 has a fixed value of 17, and drawing another card comes with a high risk of exceeding 21.

A Hard 17 may still contain an ace, but it would only be counted as 1. Other examples of a Hard 17 are a 10 and 7, or a 9 and 8.

TIP:  Most of the advice below is based on being dealt an Ace-6, but your hand can start as something else entirely and become a Soft 17. For example, you could be dealt 3-3 initially, then draw an Ace on your first hit. Regardless of how many cards are in your hand, if it’s a Soft 17, the playing approach explained below applies.

Blackjack Dealer Rules For Soft 17

The dealer’s hand always plays out according to a simple algorithm.

  • If the hand is 16 or less, the dealer must hit until the hand reaches 17 or more, or busts.
  • If the dealer has an Ace, they’ll stand on a Soft 18 or more.
  • Blackjack dealer rules on Soft 17 will vary from casino to casino (and sometimes between tables). The most common rule is for the dealer to stand on Soft 17, but in some games the dealer must hit on Soft 17 (which is slightly advantageous for the players).

Is Soft 17 A Good Hand?

Players typically stand when their hand reaches 17 or higher. But just because you’re taught to stand on 17, doesn’t mean it’s a good hand. In fact, it’s the opposite.

A hand valued at 17 gives players a false sense of safety. A 17 only wins if the dealer busts. And statistics show that 17 is a losing hand in the long run. That is to say, if you were to play a blackjack game where you were automatically dealt a 17 every single hand, you would slowly but surely lose money over the long run. In technical terms, we’d say that a hand of 17 has a negative win expectation.

…with one caveat (of course). While 17 isn’t a strong hand, if you happen to have a Soft 17, you have an opportunity to improve that hand. Where a Hard 17 leaves you with no good options, a Soft 17 gives you the chance to take a sad song and make it better. Just follow these three simple rules.

How To Play Soft 17 In Blackjack

Rule #1: Don’t Just Stand There

If you have a Hard 17, you’ve hit a dead-end. You have a weak hand, and what’s worse, you can’t safely take a hit to try and improve it. That’s why Soft 17 strategy demands at least taking a risk-free hit.

And returning to the statistics: hitting on Soft 17 turns your slightly negative expectation to a slightly positive one. So always remember the first rule of Soft 17 strategy: Never ever (ever) stand.  

TIP:  Never means never. Dealer shows a Seven? Hit. The player in front of me just drew a bunch of small cards? Hit. Playing in first position at the table? Hit. Playing with a certain rule variation? Hit. Repeat after me: never stand with a Soft 17.

Rule #2: Take A Hit

Hitting on Soft 17 improves your chances of winning, even though some players are hesitant to break up a hand valued at 17. Just remember the math: you’re better off trying to improve your hand.

Here’s the good news: Only 5 of the 13 card ranks in the deck will actually make your Soft 17 into a worse hand. The other 8 possibilities will either improve it or leave it unchanged. So, Rule #2 of Soft 17 strategy is: If in doubt, take a hit.

Rule #3  Double Down If Possible

In some cases, you’ll be in such a strong position that you’ll want to do more than just hit your Soft 17. There are scenarios where you should double down. (If you need a refresher, check out this post on when to double down).

If the dealer is showing a bust card (2 through 6), their chance of busting obviously goes way up. So if rules permit, you want to double down to increase your bet size in this situation.  Rule #3 of Soft 17 strategy is: Double down (if it’s allowed) when the dealer shows a 3, 4, 5, or 6.

TIP:  In the majority of blackjack games, the player is limited to doubling down on a hand of 9, 10, or 11. If that’s the case, you’ll have to settle for merely hitting your Soft 17.  

Advanced Rule Variations

Here are a few nuances to the three rules of Soft 17 strategy for more advanced players.

  • Single-deck blackjack games are rare, but if you find yourself in one that allows doubling on any two cards, the mathematics dictates you should double down on your Soft 17 versus a dealer 2 (as well as 3 through 6).
  • For card counters, there is a widely known list of basic strategy deviations that show 18 situations where a player should alter their play depending on the composition of the remaining deck. Soft 17 does not appear in that list, so counters should follow these rules along with everyone else.

What To Do After Hitting On Your Soft 17

If you’ve followed the above rules, you will have added at least one card to your Soft 17. Let’s discuss the scenarios that can arise after hitting on your Soft 17.

  • The most frequent outcome of hitting or doubling on Soft 17 is that you add a 10, Jack, Queen, or King, turning your hand into a Hard 17. Your only play is to stand and hope the dealer busts.
  • If you draw an Ace, 2, 3, or 4, congratulations, you’ve improved your Soft 17 to an 18 or better. Once your hand reaches 18, you have a positive win expectation, so in most circumstances, you’ll stand.
  • Drawing a 5 through 9 on your Soft 17 means your hand is worse, but play continues. You now have a hand valued at anywhere from 12 to 16. Yuck! At this point just revert to basic blackjack strategy (you can use these blackjack strategy charts to help). Against a dealer bust card, stand. Otherwise you’ll want to take the risk to hit and improve your lousy hand.

Learn The Rules. Never Waver.

That last scenario haunts blackjack players.  Taking a seemingly respectable 17 and busting, only to watch a dealer with a strong up card bust is sickening feeling. Next time a Soft 17 appears that player will be tempted to stand pat.

Don’t fall into that trap! You will have inevitably have bad beats when playing out Soft 17 hands. But just remember the statistics. And remember that while 17 is a dead-end hand, Soft 17 gives you an escape route. Use it! And if you play by the three Soft 17 strategy rules above, you’ll be a better blackjack player.


For more advanced strategy discussions on blackjack and other casino games, check out my book, Casino Gambling for Dummies.

]]>